JP2015181587A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a variable winning device which is provided in a game area and is changed into a first state that game media can enter by operation of a movable member forming at least a part of a flow path of the game media and into a second state that the game media are hard to enter or the game media cannot enter; adjustment means which is provided in the flow path formed by the movable member and can adjust a passage time of the game media passing through the flow path; a specific area where the game media can pass; and determination means which determines whether or not a prescribed condition is established on the basis of passage of the game media through a start area provided in the game area. The variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state by the operation of the movable member on the basis of the passage of the game media through the specific area on condition that the determination means determines that the prescribed condition has been established.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are given to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There is a configuration that can be controlled to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol). . In such a gaming machine, when a specific display result is obtained, for example, a variable that changes between an open state in which a game medium can be won in a winning area (for example, a big winning opening, etc.) and a closed state in which no winning is possible (or difficult to win). The state of the winning device is controlled to an open state a predetermined number of times.

  Moreover, what is equipped with a slide-type variable winning apparatus is known as such a game machine (for example, refer patent document 1).

JP 2011-212365 A

  However, in a slide-type variable winning device in which the game medium rolling on the rolling surface wins when it is in the open state, before the game medium rolls on the rolling surface (for example, the game medium is fired). There is a problem that the player loses if the variable prize-winning device is in an open state (for example, when it is not done).

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a technical machine that prevents a player from losing as much as possible.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a special game) using a game medium (for example, a game ball). (For example, the game area 10 and the like), the first of which the game medium can enter by the operation of a movable member (for example, the bottom member 23, the bottom member 1023, etc.) that forms at least a part of the flow path of the game medium. A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 22 such as FIG. 2 or FIG. 73) that changes between a state (for example, an open state) and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is difficult or impossible to enter. Adjusting means (for example, a regulation piece 118 or a guide channel portion) provided in a channel formed by the movable member and capable of adjusting the passage time of the game medium passing through the channel. 1115 etc. And a specific area (for example, a specific port 400) provided in the game area through which game media can pass, and a start area (first start winning port 13a, second start winning port 13b) provided in the game area. ) Determining means (for example, step S61 and step S62 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning a big hit or a small win). The specific area is provided on the upstream side of the variable prize device in the game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 1, the specific port 400 has a special variable prize ball. The variable prize winning device plays a specific area on the condition that the predetermined condition is determined to be satisfied by the determination means. Based on the medium has passed by the operation of the movable member is changed to the first state (open state) from the second state (closed state). For example, if the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the game is a jackpot (step S71 in FIG. 26), the jackpot start pre-processing in FIG. 31 is executed. Further, the CPU 56 determines that it is a small hit (step S63 in FIG. 26). The small hitting start preprocessing of FIG. 32 is executed. In the pre-hit start pre-processing of FIG. 31, based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific port 400 and the specific port switch is turned on (step S1306; Yes), the pre-opening process for the big winning opening shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. (Step S1313), and the special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state (Step S1406 in FIG. 36, Step S1416 in FIG. 37). In the small hit start pre-processing of FIG. 32, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific port 400 and the specific port switch is turned on (step S1356; Yes), the process proceeds to the small hit release pre-processing shown in FIG. (Step S 1363), the special winning opening is controlled to the open state.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a special game) using a game medium (for example, a game ball). A game medium that can be entered by an operation of a movable member (for example, the bottom surface member 23, the bottom surface member 1023, etc.) provided in the region (for example, the game region 10) and forming at least a part of the flow path of the game medium. A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 22 such as FIG. 2 or the like) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is difficult or impossible to enter. 73 special variable winning ball devices) and adjusting means (for example, a regulation piece 118 or a guide channel) provided in a channel formed by the movable member and capable of adjusting the passage time of the game medium passing through the channel. Part 1115 ), A specific area provided in the game area through which game media can pass (for example, the specific port 400, etc.), and a start area provided in the game area (a first start winning port 13a, a second start winning port) 13b) determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the passing of the game medium (for example, winning a big hit or a small hit) (for example, step S61 in the game control microcomputer 560, step S61) The specific area is provided on the downstream side of the variable prize device in the game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the specific port 400 has a special variable prize). The variable prize device is arranged on the condition that the predetermined condition is determined to be satisfied by the determination means. Based on the game media passes, the operation of the movable member is changed to the first state (open state) from the second state (closed state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

(3) To achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a special game) using a game medium (for example, a game ball). A game medium that can be entered by an operation of a movable member (for example, the bottom surface member 23, the bottom surface member 1023, etc.) provided in the region (for example, the game region 10) and forming at least a part of the flow path of the game medium. A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 22 such as FIG. 2 or the like) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is difficult or impossible to enter. 73 special variable winning ball devices) and adjusting means (for example, a regulation piece 118 or a guide channel) provided in a channel formed by the movable member and capable of adjusting the passage time of the game medium passing through the channel. Part 1115 ), A specific area through which the game medium can pass (for example, the specific opening 400, etc.), and the game medium passes through the start areas (the first start winning opening 13a and the second start winning opening 13b) provided in the game area. Judgment means for judging whether or not a predetermined condition is established based on the fact (for example, winning of big hit, small hit, etc.) (for example, a part for executing steps S61 and S62 in the game control microcomputer 560) And the specific area is provided in a flow path formed by the movable member (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, the specific port 400 is disposed in the flow path on the bottom surface member 23). The variable winning device is based on the movement of the movable member based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area on the condition that the determination unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. , Changes to the first state (open state) from the second state (closed state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the contents of the game (for example, the conditions for opening the special variable winning ball device 22 (such as what operation should be performed) )), For example (the part where the effect control CPU 201 displays an explanation screen in step S1802 in FIG. 57, etc.), and the game content notification means The content of the game may be notified. That is, it is after the explanation screen end designation command flag is set (that is, after the explanation screen is finished displaying) whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific port 400 (see FIG. 57). ), Until the display of the explanation screen is completed (for example, when the symbol is changing or the explanation screen is being displayed), the passage of the game medium through the specific port 400 is invalid. Alternatively, the passage through the specific port 400 after the explanation screen end designation command flag is set is effective as a condition for proceeding to the next process (shifting to the jackpot display process), but the explanation screen end designation command flag is set. The passage through the specific port 400 before being performed (for example, when the symbol is changing or the explanation screen is being displayed) is invalid as a condition for proceeding to the next process (shifting to the jackpot display process) (FIGS. 57 and 58). reference). The explanation screen may be displayed while the passage of the specific port 400 is invalid (for example, while the symbol is changing or the explanation screen is being displayed) (step S1802).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

(5) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), gaming state notifying means (for example, the effect control CPU 201 can notify the gaming state as the winning notification effect in step S1813 in FIG. 15R probability change ”,“ 2R probability change ”or“ small hit ”, etc., and the determination means is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting area (for example, Whether or not a condition for controlling any one of a plurality of types of specific gaming states (first big hit to fifth big hit big hit gaming states) having different expectations is established, and the gaming state notification means When the game medium passes through the specific area on condition that the determination means determines that a condition for controlling to any one of the plurality of types of specific game states is satisfied, It may be conditions that control reports the type of the specific game state determined to be satisfied by. For example, in step S1813 of FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 201 is notified of “15R probability change” when the big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the big hit start 1 designation command is stored, and corresponds to the big hit start 2 designation command. “2R probability change” is notified when the big hit start designation command reception flag is stored, and “small hit” is notified when the big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the small hit start designation command is stored. The process data may be selected.
According to such a structure, the interest of the game at the time of passage can be raised more.

(6) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the variable prize apparatus may be configured such that a predetermined time after the game medium passes through the specific area on condition that the determination unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. When the time has elapsed, the game state changes from the second state (closed state) to the first state (open state), and the game medium that has passed through the specific area in the game area is the position of the variable winning device. It may be a time based on the time to flow down. For example, after the game ball has passed through the specific port 400, the time until it becomes an open state for the first round (first time) (preparation time Tb before opening after passing through the specific port), or the game ball does not pass through the specific port 400 The game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 is the bottom surface of the special variable winning ball device 22 until a predetermined time has elapsed until the first round (first time) is released (preparation time Td before opening after not passing notification). The time until reaching the downstream region 23L of the member 23 (flowing down) (the downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port) is set.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), the variable prize-winning device is in the first state (opened) based on a predetermined maximum number of winning (10) game media winning. (State) to the second state (closed state), and the upper limit winning number of game media may be simultaneously present in the flow path on the movable member. For example, if it is within an interval period such as 7 seconds that is equal to or longer than the flow-down time Ta (6 seconds), before the end of the interval period (before the special variable winning ball device 22 that has been closed transitions to the open state). The maximum number (10) of game balls may be stored on the bottom member 23.
According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7), the variable winning device is configured so that the game medium flows from the upstream region to the downstream region of the movable member (for example, the bottom member 23). Alternatively, when the short predetermined period has elapsed, the second state (closed state) may be changed to the first state (open state). For example, when it is the first big hit, it may be changed from the closed state to the open state when the first closing time (3 seconds) shorter than the flow-down time Ta (6 seconds) has elapsed. Further, when the second to fifth big hits or the first to fourth small hits, the second closed time (2 seconds) shorter than the flow-down time Ta (6 seconds) has passed and the state changes from the closed state to the open state. You may make it make it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of the special variable prize-winning device with which the pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable prize-winning device with which the pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable prize-winning device with which the pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a top view of the special variable prize-winning device with which the pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a perspective view of the drive device which switches opening and closing of the special variable prize-winning device with which a pachinko game machine is equipped, (A) is a perspective view in a closed state, (B) is a perspective view in an open state. It is a figure explaining the falling time of the game ball which passes the special variable prize-winning apparatus with which a pachinko gaming machine is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the open | release pattern etc. of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the open | release pattern etc. of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the open | release pattern etc. of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit start pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process before a small hit start. It is explanatory drawing which shows the opening / closing time table in which the opening / closing time of the special variable winning ball apparatus was set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the opening / closing time table in which the opening / closing time of the special variable winning ball apparatus was set. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the determination ratio of the during-change notice effect by the during-change notice effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the notice effect during change and the effect mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the determination ratio of the closing time effect by the closing time effect determination table for determining a closing time effect. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a round. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a falling ball number effect process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the falling ball number effect process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the falling ball number effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other display operation example in an effect display apparatus. It is the perspective view and top view of the special variable prize-winning apparatus by another example. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to another example. It is the perspective view and top view of the special variable prize-winning apparatus by another example.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the drawings used in the following description, “up”, “down”, “left”, and “right” indicate directions of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, in the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the front side of the drawing in FIG. 1 is “front” and the back side of the drawing in FIG. 1 is “rear”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape and a front frame 3 attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. A glass door frame 4 and a lower door frame 5 are provided on the front surface of the front frame 3 so as to be openable and closable around the left side.

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 6 is provided on the lower surface of the lower door frame 5. Under the hitting ball supply tray 6, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 7 (lower plate) for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 6 and a hitting operation handle 8 for firing the hit ball. A game board 9 is detachably attached to the front frame 3 behind the glass door frame 4.

  The game board 9 includes a board surface plate (not shown) made of a translucent synthetic resin material in which the game area 10 is formed on the front side of the game board 9, and a non-translucent synthetic resin having a predetermined thickness width dimension. It is made of a material, and is composed of a spacer member (not shown) provided on the front surface with an attachment surface to which the panel face plate is attached. Further, on the back side of the game board 9, game parts related to the game such as a variable display control unit (not shown) including an effect display device (image display device) 11, an effect control board 80, etc. are assembled. Units are assembled together.

  The game board unit is disposed on the back side of the game board 9, the game board 9, and a decoration unit (not shown) for decorating the game board 9 from the back side. 11 and a variable display control unit including an effect control board 80 and the like, and is detachably attached to the game board 9.

  The effect display device 11 is provided in the vicinity of the center of the game area 10 and has a plurality of variable display units each variably displaying an effect effect symbol (also referred to as a decoration symbol). The effect display device 11 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display area, 11L, 11C, and 11R in the figure) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The effect display device 11 performs variable display of the effect symbol as a decorative (effect) symbol during a variable symbol special display period by a first special symbol display 12a or a second special symbol display 12b described later. . The effect display device 11 that performs variable display of effect symbols is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 80.

  The first special symbol display 12a for variably displaying the first special symbol as the first identification information is provided at the lower right position on the game board 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 12a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 12a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. The second special symbol display 12b for variably displaying the second special symbol as the second identification information is provided above the first special symbol display 12a. The second special symbol display 12b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 12b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In the present embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 12a and the second special symbol display 12b each variably display a number (or two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99 using, for example, two 7-segment LEDs. It may be configured.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 12a and the second special symbol indicator 12b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  The variable display of the first special symbol is a variable display start condition (for example, when a game ball has won a first start winning opening 13a, which will be described later), which is a variable display execution condition. For example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, and the big hit game is not executed) is started, When the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (definite special symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol starts the variable display after the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has won a second start winning opening 13b described later). Starts when a condition (for example, a state in which the number of reserved memories is not 0, a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, and a jackpot game is not executed) is established When the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (definite special symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  The effect display device 11 is for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 12a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 12b. The display of the effect symbol as a symbol for “for” is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 12a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 11 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 12b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 11 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the variable display period is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 12a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 12b, the effect display device 11 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Below the effect display device 11, a normal winning device 20 having the first start winning port 13a is provided. The game ball that won the first start winning opening 13a is guided to the back of the game board 9, and the first start opening switch 14a (for example, proximity switch) and the first winning confirmation switch 14b (for example, photo sensor, see FIG. 8). ) Is detected.

  Also, below the normal winning device 20 having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13a, a normal variable winning device 21 having the second starting winning port 13b through which a game ball can be won is provided. . The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 13b is guided to the back of the game board 9 and detected by the second start opening switch 15a and the second winning confirmation switch 15b (see FIG. 8). .

  The ordinary variable winning device 21 of the present embodiment opens and closes the opening / closing plate 17 by the solenoid 16 to change the second start winning opening 13b between an open state (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state). Let The opening / closing plate 17 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is closed by covering the second start winning prize opening 13b from the front, and is rotated about 90 degrees about the lower portion of the lower end toward the front to make the second start The winning opening 13b is opened. When the normal variable winning device 21 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 13b (easier to start winning), which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the normal variable winning device 21 is in the closed state, the game ball is basically in a state of not winning the second start winning port 13b.

  The occurrence of abnormal winning is determined based on the detection results of the first start opening switch 14a and the first winning confirmation switch 14b and the detection results of the second starting opening switch 15a and the second winning confirmation switch 15b. A security signal is externally output based on the detection of the occurrence of.

  Next, on the upper part of the second special symbol display 12b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13a, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). Is displayed separately from the first special symbol hold memory display unit and the first special symbol hold memory display unit, and displays the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 13b, that is, the second reserved memory number. For example, a special symbol hold memory display 18 including a 7-segment LED provided with a second special symbol hold memory display unit is provided. The first special symbol reserved memory display unit displays up to four first reserved memory numbers in the order of winning, and increases the number of indicators that are turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 12a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one. In addition, the second special symbol reserved memory display unit displays up to four second reserved memory numbers in the order of winning, and increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 12b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one. In this example, the upper limit number (up to 4) is provided for the starting memory number by winning at the first starting winning port 13a and the starting memory number by winning at the second starting winning port 13b. May be four or more.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 11 is provided with a first hold memory display unit 19a for displaying the first hold memory number and a second hold memory display unit 19b for displaying the second hold memory number. . In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  In this embodiment, the ordinary variable winning device 21 is provided below the ordinary winning device 20, but the ordinary winning device 20 may be provided below the ordinary variable winning device 21. In this embodiment, the normal variable winning device 21 is configured to change between an open state (open state) and a closed state (closed state). However, the normal winning device 20 is a normal variable winning device 20 and is open and closed. It is good also as a structure which changes to a state.

  Next, in the present embodiment, the special variable winning device 22 is provided at a position below the effect display device 11 in the game area 10 and at a predetermined distance to the right from the normal winning device 20. As will be described in detail later, the special variable winning ball device 22 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and has a plate-like bottom member 23 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving forward and backward, the game is changed between an open state (open state) in which a game ball can win a prize winning opening 24 positioned below the bottom surface member 23 and a closed state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot be won. The special variable winning device 22 has a bottom face in a big hit gaming state that occurs when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 12a and when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 12b. A plurality of rounds of opening control is performed in which the bottom member 23 is moved backward from the closed state in which the member 23 is moved forward toward the front, and the large winning opening 24 serving as a winning area is opened. Further, the special variable winning device 22 is a small hit that occurs when a small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 12a and when a small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 12b. Even in the gaming state, the opening control is performed a plurality of times to open the large winning opening 24 that becomes the winning area by moving the bottom member 23 backward from the closed state in which the bottom member 23 is moved forward toward the front. Run.

  Two switches (a count switch 25a and a third winning confirmation switch 25b, see FIG. 8) capable of detecting a game ball won in the special winning opening 24 are provided in the special winning opening 24. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the count switch 25a is disposed on the upper side in the special winning opening 24, and the third winning confirmation switch 25b is disposed on the lower side. Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball won in the special winning opening 24 is guided to the back of the game board 9, and is first detected by the count switch 25a, and then detected by the third winning confirmation switch 25b. . The count switch 25a is provided at a position where the game ball can be detected until 2.0 seconds elapses after the game ball has won the big winning opening 24.

  When a game ball is detected by the count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b is used. More prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter). Therefore, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is in the open state, it is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is in the closed state, the gaming ball cannot pass through (enter) the large winning opening 24 to obtain a winning ball, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Next, a normal symbol display 26 (variable display means) is provided below the first special symbol display 12a. The normal symbol display 26 includes, for example, two lamps. When the game ball passes through the gate 32 described later and is detected by the gate switch 32a, or when it passes through the gate 33 described later and is detected by the gate switch 33a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 26 is started. The In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. Then, when the lamp on the lower side of the normal symbol display 26 is turned on and it is a win, the normal variable winning device 21 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the normal variable winning device 21 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the lower lamp is turned on (a state in which a game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 13b). ). On the upper part of the special symbol holding memory display 18, a normal symbol holding memory display having four display portions (for example, four segments of seven segment LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls passed through the gate 32 or the gate 33. 27 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32 or the gate 33, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a or the gate switch 33a, the normal symbol hold memory display 27 increases the number of display units to be lit. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 26 is started, the number of display units that are lit is reduced by one.

  In addition, the normal symbol holding storage display unit 27 composed of 7 segment LEDs, together with four display units (segments) for displaying the number of winning balls passed through the gate 32 or the gate 33, for example, a special variable winning ball device 22 at the time of big hit. There are two display units (segments) indicating the number of times the game has been released (number of big hit rounds), and two display units (segments) indicating the gaming state, but these display units are separate from the normal symbol hold storage display unit You may comprise with the indicator of. The normal symbol display 26 is a segment LED that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called ordinary symbols (also called ordinary symbols and common symbols). You may comprise.

  In the present embodiment, the gate 32 is provided on the left side of the effect display device 11. A gate 33 is provided between the special variable winning device 22 and the ordinary variable winning device 21. More specifically, the gate 33 is provided on the lower left side of the bottom member 23. A number of nails are planted around the special variable winning device 22 and the gate 33. These nails guide the game ball to the special variable winning device 22, guide the game ball that has passed the special variable winning device 22 without winning the grand prize opening 24, or passed the gate 33. It is planted to guide the game ball to the normal variable winning device 21. Note that a nail for guiding the game ball to the normal winning device 20 or the normal variable winning device 21 is also provided in the left region of the game region 10.

  In addition, an effect gate (upstream game medium detecting means) 34 is provided at the upper right of the special variable winning device 22. More specifically, the effect gate 34 is provided on the upper right side of the bottom member 23. The game ball that has passed through the effect gate 34 is detected by the effect gate switch 34a. In this embodiment, the game ball flows down to the special variable winning device 22 after passing through the effect gate 34, and passes through the effect gate 34 before flowing down to the special variable winning device 22.

  In addition, a specific port (also referred to as “specific gate”, “operation gate”, or “combined operation gate”) 400 is provided at the upper right of the special variable winning device 22. More specifically, the specific port 400 is provided above the effect gate 34. The game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 is detected by a specific port switch (also referred to as “specific gate switch” or “operation gate switch”) 400a. In the present embodiment, most of the game balls that have passed through the specific port 400 pass through the effect gate 34 (that is, flow down to the special variable winning device 22), but all of the game balls that have passed through the specific port 400 pass through the effect gate 34. You may make it do. In the present embodiment, most of the game balls that pass through the effect gate 34 (that is, flow down to the special variable winning device 22) pass through the specific opening 400 before passing through the effect gate 34, but pass through the effect gate 34. All of the game balls may pass through the specific port 400 before passing through the effect gate 34.

  A decorative frame 35 is provided around the effect display device 11. The decorative frame body 35 includes a lamp and a movable object (not shown), and produces an effect by operating the lamp and the movable object together with the variable display of the effect display device 11. The decorative frame body 35 is formed in an arc shape along the right peripheral edge of the game area 10 on the right outer periphery, and defines a right passing area 36 for game balls between the right peripheral edge of the game area 10. Thereby, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to guide the game ball that has passed through the right passing area 36 to the special variable winning device 22 side.

  In addition, an out-port 28 for absorbing a game ball that has not won a prize is provided at a lower portion of the game area 10. Furthermore, four speakers 29 that emit sound effects are provided on the left, right, top, and bottom of the outside of the game area 10. Furthermore, a top frame lamp 30a, a left frame lamp 30b, and a right frame lamp 30c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 10. The top frame lamp 30a, the left frame lamp 30b, and the right frame lamp 30c are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, a prize ball lamp that is turned on during the prize ball payout is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 30b, and the supply ball is cut in the vicinity of the top frame lamp 30a. A ball-out lamp that is turned on is provided. Note that the award ball lamp and the out-of-ball lamp are controlled to be turned on by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board when the award ball is being paid out or when the out-of-ball is detected. Further, although not particularly illustrated, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The passage route of the game ball in the game area 10 and the operation method of the passage route and the hit ball operation handle 8 will be described. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball launched by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 8 is displayed as a decorative frame. 35 is routed on either the left or right route. In FIG. 1, R <b> 1 indicates a route defined on the left side of the decorative frame body 35, and an arrow R <b> 2 indicates a route defined on the right side of the decorative frame body 35. The route R2 is a route that passes through the right passing region 36. The game ball flows down below the game area 10 through one of the routes R1 and R2.

  Generally, launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down the game area 10 through the route R1 is referred to as “left-handed”, whereas the game ball passes through the route R2 and plays the game area. Launching a game ball so as to flow down 10 is called “right-handed”.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special variable winning device 22 is provided in the gaming area 10 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, so that the game ball passing through the route R2 may win the big winning opening 24. Is high. On the other hand, the game balls passing through the route R1 are less likely to win the grand prize opening 24. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the big hit gaming state and the special variable prize-winning device 22 is opened and closed, the player makes a “right strike” so that the game ball can easily win the big prize opening 24.

  Further, the special variable winning device 22 is provided at substantially the same height in the vertical direction as the normal winning device 20 having the first start winning port 13a, and the game ball passing through the route R2 is the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the special variable winning device 22 is passed without winning the big winning opening 24 without being in the big hit gaming state, the possibility of winning the first start winning opening 13a is low. On the other hand, there is a gate 33 between the ordinary variable winning device 21 having the second start winning opening 13b and the special variable winning device 22, and the game ball passing through the route R2 can easily pass through the gate 33. Yes. However, the normal variable winning device 21 does not open the second start winning port 13b only when the normal symbol display 26 is turned on and hits. For this reason, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not in a specific gaming state (detailed state and time shortening state to be described later in detail), the player should make “left-handed” and win the first start winning opening 13a. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes a big hit gaming state.

  Whether the player makes “left-handed” or “right-handed” is selected according to the gaming state, and the player adjusts the hitting operation handle 8 to make “left-handed” or “right-handed”. Make a distinction between “strikes”. The hitting operation handle 8 is configured to launch a game ball when the player rotates, and adjust the launch speed of the game ball according to the operation angle. Further, the hitting operation handle 8 is configured to continuously fire the game ball at a constant firing interval when the operation is maintained at an operation angle at which the game ball can be launched. The hitting operation handle 8 is regulated so that the operation angle is restricted within a predetermined angle range and the “right hit” state is obtained when the hitting operation handle 8 is operated to a substantially maximum angle. Note that it is preferable to display on the effect display device 11 to urge the player to “right-turn” when a specific gaming state is reached.

  A game ball launched from a hitting ball launching device (not shown) by a player's operation enters the game area 10 through a shot ball guide passage (not shown) formed on the left side of the game area 10, and then the game area. Come down 10. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13a and is detected by the first start port switch 14a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 12a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 11 starts variable display of the effect symbol. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13a. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning port 13b and is detected by the second start port switch 15a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable symbol variable display ends). The second start condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display unit 12b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 11 starts variable display of the effect symbol. . That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 13b. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 12a and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 12b are stopped when a certain time has elapsed. If the confirmed special symbol, which is a special symbol at the time of stoppage, is a big hit symbol, it becomes “big hit”, and it shifts to a big hit gaming state. Further, if the confirmed special symbol is a small hit symbol, it becomes “small hit” and the game proceeds to the small hit gaming state. Further, if the confirmed special symbol is a symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, it becomes “out of”.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning device 22 performs release control for releasing until a predetermined time elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins. The release control in the big hit gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times that the opening control is executed differs depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the big hit gaming state that shifts after becoming the first big hit, which will be described later, the release control is executed for 15 rounds (the number of open times of each round is 1 time) (see FIG. 16). Also, in the big hit gaming state that shifts after becoming either the second big hit to the fifth big hit, which will be described later, the release control is executed for two rounds (the number of times each round is released) (see FIG. 17). Also, in the small hit gaming state, the special variable winning device 22 performs the opening control a predetermined number of times. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of times that the opening control is executed is constant regardless of the type of small hits. Specifically, the small hit gaming state that shifts after any one of the first small hit to the fourth small hit, which will be described later, is a big hit game that shifts after four times (second big hit to fifth big hit) The release control is executed (the same number as the number of releases for two rounds by the release control in the state) (see FIG. 18). In the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the player can increase the possibility of winning the game ball in the big winning opening 24 by “right-handed”.

  Hereinafter, the variable display game executed by the first special symbol display 12a (variable display game for variably displaying the first special graphic) is also referred to as a first special graphic game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display 12b. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. When the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as a “special figure game”. On the other hand, the variable display game (variable display game for variably displaying the normal figure) executed by the normal symbol display 26 is also referred to as a general figure game (or “normal figure game”).

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 11L, 11C, and 11R provided in the effect display device 11, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol on the first special symbol display 12a. Corresponding to the start of one of the second special figure games on the display device 12b, the variable display (variation display) of the effect symbols (decorative symbols) is started.

  In a special game, when a confirmed special symbol that is a jackpot symbol is stopped (derived), for example, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the effect symbol being reached. After that, a definite effect symbol (definite ornament symbol) that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination (for example, a combination of the same symbols such as “7”, “7”, “7”, etc.) in the ornament symbol display areas 11L, 11C, 11R Is stopped. Regardless of the combination of symbols, for example, a special symbol that is not on the usual arrangement may be stopped to become a definite special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol.

  In a special game, when a confirmed special symbol that is a small hit symbol is stopped (derived), for example, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the effect symbol being reached. Or the predetermined display combination (for example, “3”, “5”, “7”, etc.) in the decorative symbol display areas 11L, 11C, 11R without the variable symbol display state reaching the reach state. The finalized design symbol that is a combination of Regardless of the combination of symbols, for example, a fixed special symbol that becomes a small hit symbol by stopping a special symbol that is not on the usual arrangement may be used. Note that the confirmed special symbol that becomes the small hit symbol may be the same as the fixed special symbol that becomes the big hit symbol of 2R probability variation.

  In the special game, when the confirmed special symbol that will be the off symbol is stopped and displayed (derived), the variable display state of the effect symbol will not be changed to the reach state after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Corresponding to the case where the definite effect symbols that are different from the big hit combination or the small hit combination are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 11L, 11C, and 11R, and the variable display state of the effect symbols has reached the reach state. In some cases, after the predetermined reach effect has been executed, the definite effect symbols that are misaligned in the decorative symbol display areas 11L, 11C, and 11R may be stopped and displayed.

  Note that the reach state means an effect design (“reach variation” that is not yet temporarily stopped when the effect design temporarily displayed in the display area of the effect display device 11 forms a part of the jackpot combination. (Also referred to as “symbol”) is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbol is changing synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. . Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 11L, 11C, and 11R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas) is predetermined. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium” decorative symbol) that has not yet been temporarily stopped when the promotional symbol constituting the big hit combination (eg, the symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) is temporarily stopped. In the display area, etc., the display pattern is changed, or the display pattern is a big hit combination in all or part of the decorative pattern display areas 11L, 11C, and 11R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of it.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a big hit is made (when a confirmed special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure game), the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and after the big hit gaming state ends. , Either for a predetermined period (for example, a condition that 80 special figure games are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or a condition that the fixed special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed after the big hit gaming state ends) Until the above condition is satisfied), the probability variation control, the time reduction control, and the high opening control are performed. A gaming state in which probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state (or a high probability state, a high probability state). A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state.

  When in the probability variation state, the probability that the definite special symbol, which is a big hit symbol in the special figure game, is stopped and displayed is higher than in the normal state where the probability variation control is not performed (also referred to as a low probability state or a low probability state). ing. When in the short-time state, the variation time of the special symbol (directing symbol) is shortened compared to the normal state in which the time-short control is not performed, and in addition to the normal game in the normal state in which the short-time control is not performed. Control to increase the probability that the normal symbol that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the game, the number of times the opening and closing plate 17 of the normal variable winning device 21 is opened when the normal symbol that is the winning symbol is stopped once in the normal game One or more of the controls are executed in the control to increase the opening time of the opening / closing plate 17 of the normal variable winning device 21 when the normal symbol that is the winning symbol is stopped once in the normal game.

  Hereinafter, the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a highly accurate high base state (or a certain variation state with time shortening). A gaming state in which only the time-varying control is performed and the time-shortening control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high-accuracy low base state (or a time-varying probability-changing state). In particular, the high-accuracy and high-base state may be referred to as a probability variation state. A gaming state in which the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. A gaming state in which none of the probability variation control, the time reduction control, and the high release control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. In a gaming state other than the low probability low base state, at least one of the time-shortening control and the probability variation control is performed, which is an advantageous state for the player. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state during the execution of the special game (the gaming state excluding the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state) has a low probability low base state or a high probability high base state. It becomes.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a small hit is made (when a fixed special symbol that is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure game), the small hit game state is controlled. After the winning gaming state ends, the gaming state at the time of the small hit is maintained. For example, when a small hit is made in the low probability low base state, the small hit gaming state is controlled, and after the small hit gaming state is finished, the low probability low base state is maintained. Further, for example, when a small hit is made in the high-accuracy high-base state, the small-hit gaming state is controlled.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the route R2 is connected to the gate 33 provided between the normal variable winning device 21 having the second start winning port 13b and the special variable winning device 22. Since it is relatively easy to pass, by making “right-handed” in the probability variation state or the short-time state, the possibility of winning the second start winning opening 13b increases. Therefore, the player can efficiently win the game ball in the second start winning opening 13b by “right-handed” in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In this embodiment, the display screen of the effect display device 11 is provided with a fourth symbol display area (not shown) for displaying the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol, and the normal symbol. A fourth symbol display area (not shown) for the first special symbol in which the variation of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is displayed in synchronization with the variation of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol A fourth symbol display area (not shown) for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed is provided. In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 200 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 11, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects and effects where the moving object shields all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 11 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the current variation display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 11. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation, and is not disappeared from the screen or shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  Next, FIGS. 2 to 7 are diagrams showing the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 includes a base plate portion 101 having a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is fixedly supported on the game area 10 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 10 with, for example, a screw. A large winning opening 24 opening forward is formed in a substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, and the bottom member 23 moves backward at a position above the large winning opening 24 in the base plate portion 101. When this is done, a slit-like accommodation hole 102 that is long in the left-right direction for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back side (rear) of the game area 10 is formed. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side slightly from the center in the left-right direction of the base plate portion 101, but may be on the left or right side.

  The bottom member 23 is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down toward the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is inclined downward to follow the inclination of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 23 can be moved forward and backward in a state where it is moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and a state where it is moved back as shown in FIG. On the side (rear), a driving device 103 that moves the bottom member 23 back and forth is disposed.

  The driving device 103 is housed in a housing portion 104 (indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 5 for convenience of explanation) integrally formed on the back surface of the base plate portion 101, and this housing portion 104 is formed in the game area 10. It is inserted so as to be inserted into a hole (not shown) and accommodated inside the game area 10. In addition, in this embodiment, although the accommodating part 104 is integrally formed in the base board part 101, you may fix to the base board part 101 separately.

  The driving device 103 is supported by a solenoid 106 that moves the plunger 105 forward and backward, and a tip of the plunger 105 so that one end is pivotable about the vertical direction and the other end extends rightward. A first arm portion 108 having a pivotal support hole 107 formed in the central portion thereof, and a shaft portion 110 inserted into a long hole 109 formed in the distal end portion of the first arm portion 108 at one end portion, and the other end And a second arm portion 111 extending in the front-rear direction with the portion fixed to the rear portion of the bottom surface member 23.

  The solenoid 106 is driven based on a command from the main board 40, and a pivot (not shown) is formed in the pivot hole 107 of the first arm portion 108 so that the vertical direction is the axis center (for example, formed in the housing portion 104. Is inserted. Thus, as the plunger 105 moves forward and backward, the first arm portion 108 swings about the pivotal support hole 107 and the end on the side where the long hole 109 is formed swings back and forth. The second arm part 111 is inserted along the longitudinal direction from the long hole 109 according to the swinging of the first arm part 108 by inserting the shaft part 110 so as to be relatively movable in the longitudinal direction of the long hole 109. An acting force is applied, and the bottom member 23 can be moved back and forth along the front-rear direction.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6 (A), the bottom member 23 is moved forward in a state where the plunger 105 is propelled backward, while, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), By retracting the plunger 105 from the state of FIG. 6A, the first arm portion 108 swings around the pivot hole 107 and the end on the side where the long hole 109 is formed moves backward. To do. Thereby, when the 2nd arm part 111 is pulled back, it will be in the state which the bottom face member 23 moved backward, and will be in the state which the bottom face member 23 moved forward by reverse operation | movement.

  If the bottom member 23 is moved backward to a position deeper than the base plate portion 101, the bottom member 23 is displaced from the position of the accommodation hole 102 of the base plate portion 101, and the accommodation hole is moved when the bottom member 23 is moved forward. There is a possibility that the forward movement from the accommodation hole 102 may not be properly performed, for example, by being caught by the hook of 102. Therefore, measures may be taken by configuring as follows.

  First, as a first configuration example, a stopper member that suppresses the bottom surface member 23 from moving backward to a position deeper than the base plate portion 101 may be provided. For example, when a long hole portion is formed in the front-rear direction of the second arm portion 111, a protrusion as a stopper member is inserted and fixed in the long hole portion, and the bottom member 23 is moved backward to an appropriate position. It is also possible to prevent the bottom surface member 23 from moving backward to a position deeper than the base plate portion 101 by the projection portion coming into contact with the front end portion of the long hole portion. Further, as a second configuration example, even when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward to a position deeper than the base plate portion 101, a guide portion (guide rib) that guides the bottom surface member 23 to properly move forward is provided. It is good also as providing in the back surface of the base board part 101, or the accommodating part 104. FIG. Of these first configuration example and second configuration example, either one of the configuration examples may be applied, or both of the configuration examples may be applied.

  Returning to FIG. 2 to FIG. 4, a flow path forming base part 112 protruding forward is formed on the front side of the base plate part 101. An upstream channel portion 113 that is continuous with the upstream region 23U that is the upper side end portion (right end portion) of the bottom surface member 23 and the bottom surface member 23 in the longitudinal direction, and that forms a flow path of the game ball together with the bottom surface member 23; A downstream region 23L that is a lower side end portion (left end portion) of the bottom surface member 23 and a downstream flow path portion 114 that is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface member 23 and forms a flow path of the game ball together with the bottom surface member 23 are formed. ing.

  In addition, the upper part of the flow path forming base 112 is recessed downward from the end on the bottom surface member 23 side of the upstream flow path part 113 and the downstream flow path part 114, and in the front view, the big prize opening 24 is left and right and A guide flow path portion 115 is formed to guide the game ball dropped below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 so as to surround from below.

  The upstream channel portion 113 and the downstream channel portion 114 are formed so as to incline to the left so that the game ball can flow downward. In addition, the bottom of the guide channel portion 115 extends downward to the big winning opening 24 and is recessed at a position in front of the big winning opening 24. In the recessed space at the bottom of the guide channel portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball backward toward the big prize opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 10) is disposed. ing.

  Furthermore, the front part (player side) of the flow path forming base part 112 is integrally formed with a covering part 117 that covers the upstream flow path part 113, the downstream flow path part 114, and the guide flow path part 115 from the front. Has been. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream flow passage portion 113, the downstream flow passage portion 114, and the guide flow passage portion 115 from the front, so that the game balls flowing down these flow passage portions jump to the glass door frame 4 side. It has a function to prevent it. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base 112, but may be fixed separately.

  In the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, a flow of game balls that are connected in the left-right direction, including the upstream channel portion 113, the bottom surface member 23, and the downstream channel portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. A path F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces 118 that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

  In the present embodiment, the restricting piece 118 is formed integrally with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding backward from the covering portion 117. When there is no restriction piece 118, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball flowing down to the left meanders with the movement of the longitudinal component by interfering with Than delay. These regulating pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at a predetermined interval in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. In addition, the restriction piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension that allows a game ball to pass between adjacent ones. Yes. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one restriction piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream-side passage portion 113 from the front, and the downstream-side passage portion of the covering portion 117. One restriction piece 118 is formed at a portion covering 114 from the front. In addition, a total of five restricting pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed at portions of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that cover the bottom surface member 23. Note that the number of such restriction pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulating piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

  With the arrangement of the restriction piece 118 as described above, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 of the present embodiment, the game ball P about to flow down the flow path F is placed on the flow path F. It will flow down like meandering. In the closed state of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 in which such a flow path F is formed, the game ball P basically passes through the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 without winning the big winning opening 24. On the other hand, with reference to FIG. 4, in the open state of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 in which the bottom member 23 has moved backward, the game ball P can fall into the guide flow path portion 115 of the flow path forming base portion 112. Accordingly, it is possible to flow down the guide channel portion 115 and win a prize winning opening 24.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the flow time of the game ball passing through the special variable winning device included in the pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 7, time Ta (s) indicates the flow time of the game ball P meandering from the upstream region 23U to the downstream region 23L on the bottom member 23 and flowing down from the upstream region 23U to the downstream region 23L. The flow-down time Ta is a time adjusted by the number and arrangement of the restriction pieces 118 in addition to the length and inclination (gradient) of the bottom surface member 23 in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, the flow-down time Ta is set to approximately 6 seconds.

  FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) 40. FIG. 8 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 40. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 60 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 40.

  The random number circuit 60 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine (determine) whether or not to win a jackpot based on the display result of the special symbol variable display. The random number circuit 60 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 60 is configured to select a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit selection selection function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 60. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 560 with a different numerical value) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54. The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data that the random number circuit 60 updates. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 60 can be further improved.

  Also, the gate switches 32a and 33a, the first start opening switch 14a, the first winning confirmation switch 14b, the second starting opening switch 15a, the second winning confirmation switch 15b, the count switch 25a, the third winning confirmation switch 25b, and the effect gate switch An input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the switch 34 a and the specific port switch 400 a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 40. An output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 21 and the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22 in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 40. .

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 12a, a second special symbol display 12b, a special symbol hold storage display 18, and a normal symbol display that variably displays a special symbol. 26 and the normal symbol hold storage display 27 are controlled.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 91 is also mounted on the main board 40.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (comprising the effect control microcomputer 200) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control of the effect display apparatus 11 which receives the effect control command to perform and displays the effect symbol variably.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the top frame LED 30a, the left frame LED 30b, and the right frame LED 30c provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 41, and also performs sound control. The sound output from the speaker 29 is controlled via the output board 70.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 41, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver board 41 and the audio output board 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 41 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and an RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 200 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 40 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203. Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 11 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 209 that performs display control of the effect display device 11 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 200 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 200, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 11 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 201 outputs to the VDP 209 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command or the like. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 11, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 209 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 201. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, a signal inputted from the main board 40 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in a direction toward the effect control board 80 (a signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 9 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. In addition, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 40 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 40 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the main board 40 (on the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 41 via the output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 204.

  In the lamp driver board 41, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies current to light emitters such as the top frame LED 30a, the left frame LED 30b, and the right frame LED 30c based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 29. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S5). By the processing in step S5, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S6), and proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board) 40 to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of payout prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball-out flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for performing the above.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 11, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 60 (step S15).

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 first disables the interrupt (step S17), executes the initial value random number update process (step S18a) and the display random number update process (step S18b), The interrupt is permitted again (step S19). That is, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt disabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and interrupts enable state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are finished. To.

  The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. A random number for initial value is a random number for determination (decision) for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot or a game state is shifted to a probable state) Such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a probability variation determining random number for determining whether or not to generate, a normal random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol) It is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value. A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as an effect display device 11, a normal variable winning device 21, a ball payout device 97 provided in the game machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 12a and the second special symbol display 12b). In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  In addition, when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed by the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process also in the timer interrupt process described later (that is, the timer This is because the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process), so as to avoid conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A timer interrupt process that is activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Then, the CPU 56, through the input driver circuit 58, receives the gate switches 32a and 33a, the first start opening switch 14a, the first winning confirmation switch 14b, the second starting opening switch 15a, the second winning confirmation switch 15b, and the count switch 25a. The detection signals of the third winning confirmation switch 25b, the effect gate switch 34a, and the specific port switch 400a are input, and the input of each switch is detected (switch processing: step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 12a, the second special symbol display 12b), the normal symbol display 26, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 27. Display control processing for performing display control is executed (step S22). For the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 12a and the second special symbol display 12b) and the normal symbol display 26, each display unit is selected according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37. Control to output the drive signal.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a winning notification process for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning in the special winning opening 24 and notifying the abnormality (step S24).

  After step S24, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control (determination random number update process: step S25). ). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 26 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol to the effect control microcomputer 200 (effect symbol command control process: step S30). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as a start port signal supplied to the hall management computer, a symbol determination number 1 signal, a symbol determination number 2 signal, a jackpot 1 to 3 signal, a time reduction signal, and the like. (Step S31).

  The CPU 56 also includes gate switches 32a and 33a, a first start opening switch 14a, a first winning confirmation switch 14b, a second starting opening switch 15a, a second winning confirmation switch 15b, a count switch 25a, and a third winning confirmation switch 25b. Prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detected signal is executed (step S32). Specifically, the gate switches 32a and 33a, the first start opening switch 14a, the first winning confirmation switch 14b, the second starting opening switch 15a, the second winning confirmation switch 15b, the count switch 25a, and the third winning confirmation switch 25b. In response to the winning detection based on the fact that either one of these is turned on, a payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port. (Step S34: Output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S35).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S36). Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may make it do.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S39), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S39 (excluding steps S31 and 33) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) of the special symbol becomes “out of” (when the special symbol becomes a loss symbol) Patterns PA1-1 to PA3-8 are prepared. Further, variation patterns PB2-1 to PB4-2 are prepared as variation patterns corresponding to a case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “big hit” (when the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol). Further, variation patterns PC2-1 to PC4-2 are prepared as variation patterns corresponding to a case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “small hit” (when the special symbol is a small hit symbol). .

  Among the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA3-8 corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “out of”, the variation pattern PA1-1 to variation pattern PA1-5 has a variable display result (displacement). This is a non-reach fluctuation pattern that does not reach reach until the stop display. Among the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA3-8 corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “out of”, the variation pattern PA2-1 to variation pattern PA3-8 has a variable display result (displacement). This is a reach fluctuation pattern that reaches reach before the stop display. Of the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA3-8, the fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4 are also referred to as normal reach deviation fluctuation patterns, and the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3- 8 is also referred to as a super-reach shift pattern.

  Among the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB3-8 corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “big hit”, the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-4 are also referred to as fluctuation patterns of normal reach big hit. The variation pattern PB3-1 to variation pattern PB3-8 are also referred to as variation patterns per super reach big hit. Among the fluctuation patterns PC2-1 to PC3-6 corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is “small hit”, the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-4 are both fluctuation patterns of normal reach big hits. The variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-8 are also referred to as variation patterns for super reach big hits.

  In FIG. 12, a variation pattern PA1-4 or the like is a variation pattern with a variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo ream”. In “slip”, for example, all the effect symbols are changed in the ornament symbol display areas 11L, 11C, and 11R, and then the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in some ornament symbol display areas (for example, the ornament symbol display area 11R). This is a variable display effect that is displayed again (for example, after temporarily stopping a symbol or the like that is different from the effect symbol in the reach state), then changing the temporarily stopped effect symbol again, and then stopping and displaying it again. It should be noted that in the “slip” variable display effect, there are a case where the reach state is set when the re-changed effect symbol is stopped and displayed, and a case where the reach state is not set. The “pseudo-ream” is, for example, after all the effect symbols are changed in the decorative symbol display areas 11L, 11C, and 11R, and then all the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, a predetermined pseudo-ream chance) This is a variable display effect in which after the eyes are temporarily stopped), the temporarily stopped display effect design is changed again and then stopped again. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, re-variation (temporary stop display) can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times) according to the special figure variation time.

FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random R: Random number for determining the special figure display result (can take 65536 numerical values from 0 to 65535). A special figure display result (big hit, small hit, off), which is a variable symbol display result, is determined (determined).
(2) Random 1: Random number for determining big hit type / small hit type (100 numerical values from 0 to 99 can be taken). Big hit types that are big hit types (first big hit, second big hit, third big hit, fourth big hit, fifth big hit) and small hit types that are big hit types (first small hit, second small hit, 3rd small hit, 4th small hit) is determined.
(3) Random 2: Random number for determining the variation pattern type (100 numerical values from 0 to 99 can be taken). A variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type is determined. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, in FIG. 12, the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-5 are the variation pattern type PA1, the variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4 are the variation pattern type PA2, and the variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-8 are the variation pattern type PA3. The variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-4 are the variation pattern type PB2, the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-8 are the variation pattern type PB3, the variation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-2 are the variation pattern type PB4, and the variation pattern PC2- 1 to PC2-3 may be the variation pattern type PC2, the variation patterns PC3-1 to PC3-6 may be the variation pattern type PC3, and the variation patterns PC4-1 to PC4-2 may be the variation pattern type PC4. Further, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect. The variation pattern type is also referred to as a variation category.
(4) Random 3: A random number for determining a variation pattern (can take 100 numerical values from 0 to 99). A variation pattern (variation pattern in FIG. 12) is determined. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type is determined using random 2, and subsequently, the random pattern 3 is used to determine any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type. That is, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.
(5) Random 4: Random number for determining the normal map display result (100 numerical values from 0 to 99 can be taken). The universal display result (winning or falling), which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is determined.
(For judgment per common symbol)
(6) Random 5: Random 4 random number for initial value determination (can take 100 numerical values from 0 to 99). An initial value of random 4 is determined.

  In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used. Software random numbers may be used.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram of a special figure display result determination table. The special figure display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a big hit determination value or a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. In this embodiment, a plurality of special figure display result determination tables having different setting contents are stored, and whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the probability variation state (high probability high base state) ) Or whether the variation special figure (the special symbol to be varied) is the first special figure or the second special figure (whether the first special figure game or the second special figure game is executed) In response to this, one of the special figure display result determination tables is referred.

  FIG. 14A shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (low probability low base state) and the fluctuation special figure is special figure 1. ing. That is, when the first special figure game is executed in the normal state (low probability low base state), the special figure display result determination table in FIG. When referring to the special-figure display result determination table of FIG. 14A, when the random R value is, for example, 1085, it is determined to be “out of”, and when the random R value is, for example, 13400, “big hit”. If the value of the random R is 14000, for example, it is determined to be “out of”. In other words, deciding to win a jackpot means deciding to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but also deciding to make the confirmed special symbol a jackpot symbol. Further, in the special figure display result determination table of FIG. 14A, it is not determined when “small hit” is set, but when it is determined as “small hit”, it is determined that the game is shifted to the small hit gaming state. However, it is also determined that the confirmed special symbol is a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 14B shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (low probability low base state) and the variation special figure is special figure 2. ing. That is, when the second special figure game is executed in the normal state (low probability low base state), the special figure display result determination table of FIG. 14B is referred to. When the special figure display result determination table of FIG. 14B is referred to, when the random R value is, for example, 1085, it is determined to be “small hit”, and when the random R value is, for example, 13400, “big hit” is determined. ", And when the value of the random R is 14000, for example, it is determined to be" small hit ".

  FIG. 14C shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state (highly accurate high base state) and the variation special figure is special figure 1. ing. That is, when the first special figure game is executed in the probability variation state (high probability high base state), the special figure display result determination table in FIG. When referring to the special figure display result determination table of FIG. 14C, it is determined that the random R value is, for example, 1085, “disconnected”, and when the random R value is, for example, 13400, “big hit”. If the value of the random R is 14,000, for example, it is determined to be “big hit”.

  FIG. 14D shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state (high probability high base state) and the variation special figure is the special figure 2. ing. That is, when the second special figure game is executed in the probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), the special figure display result determination table in FIG. When referring to the special figure display result determination table of FIG. 14D, when the random R value is, for example, 1085, it is determined to be “small hit”, and when the random R value is, for example, 13400, “big hit” is determined. ", And when the value of the random R is 14000, for example, it is determined to be" big hit ".

  It should be noted that the special figure display result determination table (FIG. 14A or 14B) referred to in the normal state and the special figure display result determination table referred to in the probability change state (FIG. 14). 14 (C) or the special figure display result determination table of FIG. 14 (D), the special figure display result determination table referred to in the probability variation state has a larger number of determination values assigned to the jackpot. Many. In other words, the probability variation state has a higher probability of being a big hit than the normal state.

  In addition, a determination value is assigned to a small hit in the special figure display result determination table (the special figure display result determination table in FIG. 14A or 14C) referred to when the first special figure game is executed. Although not done, the special figure display result judgment table (the special figure display result judgment table in FIG. 14B or FIG. 14D) referred to when the second special figure game is executed is judged as a small hit. A value has been assigned. That is, the second special figure game may be a small hit, but the first special figure game will not be a small hit.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. The big hit type determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and each big hit compared with random 1 (first big hit, second big hit, third big hit, fourth big hit, fifth big hit) This is a table in which determination values are set. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot type determination tables having different setting contents are stored, and whether the fluctuation special figure (special symbol to be changed) is the first special figure or the second special figure (first special figure) Depending on whether the game is executed or the second special figure game is executed), any special figure display result determination table is referred to. The small hit type determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and each small hit compared with the random 1 (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit, fourth small hit). This is a table in which determination values for hits are set. In this embodiment, one kind of small hit type determination table is stored.

  The first big hit is a 15 round probability change big hit (15R probability change) in which the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is the opening pattern A (see FIG. 16). The second big hit is a two round probability variable big hit (2R probability change) in which the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is the opening pattern B1 (see FIG. 17). The third big hit is a two round probability change big hit (2R probability change) in which the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is the opening pattern B2 (see FIG. 17). The fourth jackpot is a two-round probability variation big hit (2R probability variation) in which the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is the opening pattern B3 (see FIG. 17). The fifth big hit is a two round probability variable big hit (2R probability change) in which the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is the opening pattern B4 (see FIG. 17). The first small hit is a small hit in which the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is the opening pattern B1 (see FIG. 18). The second small hit is a small hit in which the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is the opening pattern B2. The third small hit is a small hit in which the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is the opening pattern B3 (see FIG. 18). The fourth small hit is a small hit in which the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is the opening pattern B4.

  FIG. 15A shows the determination ratio of the big hit type when the special figure display result of the first special figure game is “big hit”. That is, when the special figure display result of the first special figure game is “big hit”, whether it is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the probability variation state (high probability high base state), FIG. ) Is determined. When referring to the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 15A, the random 1 value is 95, for example, even when the random 1 value is 28, for example, and the random 1 value is 80, for example. It will be decided to win the first big hit.

  FIG. 15B shows the determination ratio of the big hit type when the special figure display result of the second special figure game is “big hit”. That is, in the normal state (low probability low base state) or the probability variation state (high probability high base state), when the special figure display result of the second special figure game is “big hit”, FIG. ) Is determined. When referring to the big hit type determination table of FIG. 15B, when the random 1 value is 28, for example, it is determined to be the first big hit, and when the random 1 value is 80, for example, the third big hit is determined. When the value of random 1 is 95, for example, it is determined to be the fifth big hit.

  FIG. 15C shows the determination ratio of the small hit type when the special figure display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is “small hit”. That is, whether it is a normal state (low probability low base state) or a probability variation state (high probability high base state), the first special figure game, or the second special figure game. When the figure display result is “small hit”, the small hit type determination table in FIG. When referring to the small hit type determination table of FIG. 15C, when the random 1 value is 28, for example, it is determined to be the second small hit, and when the random 1 value is 80, for example, the fourth small hit type is determined. Decide to win.

  Note that the big hit type determination table (the big hit type determination table in FIG. 15A) referred to when the special figure display result of the first special figure game is “big hit” is 2R probability variable big hit (second big hit, second big hit, The big hit type, the fourth big hit, and the fifth big hit are not assigned the decision values, but the big hit type determination table (FIG. 15 (FIG. 15) referred to when the special figure display result of the second special figure game is “big hit”. In the big hit type judgment table (B), a judgment value is assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit. That is, the 2R probability variation big hit may occur in the second special figure game, but the 2R probability variation big hit does not occur in the first special figure game. A determination value for 2R probability variation big hit may be assigned to the first special figure game. Further, the determination value may be different from that of the second special figure game.

  Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 22 in the big hit for each big hit type will be described. FIGS. 16, 17 and 18 are explanatory views showing an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 and the like. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of opening control patterns (opening patterns) by the special variable winning ball device 22 in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the release control by the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed according to any one of the plurality of types of release patterns according to the big hit type or the small hit type.

  FIG. 16 schematically shows an opening pattern or the like in the big hit gaming state in the case of the first big hit. In the case of the first jackpot, as shown in FIG. 16, after the symbols are confirmed (the special symbols that become jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed), an explanation display of game contents is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). . The description display of the game content is to display information for explaining the content of the game to the player. Specifically, the condition for the special variable winning ball device 22 to be in an open state (how to For example, if it is necessary to perform various operations. In this embodiment, in the case of the first big hit (the same applies to the second big hit to the fifth big hit), if the game ball passes through the specific port 400 by right-hand hit, the type of hit after the passage (15R probability variation, 2R probability variation) ) And the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 shifts to the big hit game state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is in an open state. A right-pointing arrow (for example, a small arrow) is displayed.

  In this embodiment, in the case of a small hit (first small hit to fourth small hit), if the game ball passes the specific port 400 by right-hand hit, the type of hit (small hit) is notified after passing. After that, since it shifts to the small hit gaming state from the predetermined transition start timing thereafter, as in the case of the big hit, character information such as “I will inform you by passing through the gate”, a right-pointing arrow that suggests a right strike, etc. Is displayed. In the case of a small hit, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific port 400 by right-handed, the type of hit at the predetermined latest notification timing is notified, and the small hit gaming state from the predetermined transition start timing thereafter Migrate to

  Note that the character information “I will notify you by passing through the gate” is an example of an explanation display of the game content. For example, in this embodiment, when shifting to the big hit gaming state (the same is true when changing to the small hit gaming state), the type of winning is notified. Character information is displayed. Regardless of whether or not the type of winning is notified, for example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is displayed as “the attacker opens by passing the gate”. You may display the conditions for becoming an open state.

  After the explanation display is finished (that is, after the predetermined time has passed since the symbol is determined), when the game ball passes the specific opening 400, a hit notification effect is executed, and a hit type in the hit notification effect (specifically, 15R) (Probability change) is notified. In this embodiment, after the explanation display is finished and before the game ball passes through the specific port 400, information for prompting a right strike is displayed. For example, character information “right-handed !!” and a right-pointing arrow (for example, a large arrow) suggesting right-handed are displayed. The same applies to the second big hit to the fifth big hit and the first small hit to the fourth small hit. The hit notification effect in the big hit (first big hit to fifth big hit) may be referred to as a fanfare effect. Also, the hit notification effect in the small hit (first small hit to the fourth small hit) may also be referred to as a fanfare effect (only the hit notification effect in the big hit may be referred to as a fanfare effect).

  In this embodiment, the hit notification effect is executed after the game ball passes through the specific port 400, but before the game ball passes through the specific port 400 (for example, during change, when the symbol is fixed, during explanation display) The notification effect may be executed after the explanation display ends to a predetermined timing before passing through the gate. The same applies to the second big hit to the fifth big hit and the first small hit to the fourth small hit.

  After the winning notification effect is finished, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is controlled as shown in FIG. 16 according to the opening pattern (opening pattern A) in the first big hit big hit gaming state. The opening pattern A is an opening pattern in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 29.5 seconds after the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed for 3 seconds for each of the 15 rounds. That is, as the control for the first round, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed for 3000 milliseconds and then the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 29500 milliseconds. After such control of the first round is completed, the same control as the first round is repeatedly executed in each of the second to fifteenth rounds. In addition, after the 15th round is executed, an ending (effect) is executed. Note that the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed in each round (3 seconds in the open pattern A) is also referred to as an interval period.

  That is, in the case of the first big hit, as shown in FIG. 16, a hit notification effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific port 400 after the explanation display ends, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened. It is controlled according to pattern A. In other words, if the game ball is not passed through the specific port 400 after the explanation display is completed, the hit notification effect is not executed, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is maintained in the closed state.

  Note that the “gate invalid” shown in FIG. 16 is a special variable even if the game ball is passed through the specific port 400 before the end of the explanation display (for example, while the explanation is being displayed during symbol change). This indicates that it is invalid as a condition for bringing the winning ball apparatus 22 into an open state. For example, even if the game ball is passed to the specific port 400 by making a right turn during the explanation display, if the game ball is not passed to the specific port 400 after the explanation display is completed, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is not opened but is kept closed. “Gate valid” shown in FIG. 16 represents that it is effective as a condition for opening the special variable winning ball device 22 if the game ball passes through the specific port 400 after the explanation display ends. Note that the “gate valid” period may end when the game ball passes through the specific port 400 after the explanation display ends. The same applies to the second big hit to the fifth big hit and the first small hit to the fourth small hit.

  Further, it may be notified whether the “gate is invalid” or “gate is valid”. In addition, when switching from “gate invalid” to “gate valid”, it is also possible to notify that the gate is switched to “gate valid” before switching to “gate valid” (for example, a countdown display until “gate valid” is reached). Good. Further, when a game ball passes through the specific port 400 when “gate invalid”, it may be notified that the passage is invalid.

  FIG. 17A schematically shows an opening pattern in the big hit gaming state in the case of the second big hit. In the case of the second big hit, as shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the symbol is determined, the explanation display of the game content is performed for a predetermined time as in the case of the first big hit. The length of the predetermined time (display time for explanation display) may be the same as or different from the first big hit. When the game ball passes through the specific opening 400 after the explanation display is finished, a hit notification effect is executed, and the type of hit (specifically, 2R probability change) is notified in the hit notification effect.

  After completion of the winning notification effect, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled as shown in FIG. 17A according to the opening pattern (opening pattern B1) in the big hit game state of the second jackpot. In the opening pattern B1, for each of the two rounds, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed for 7 seconds, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 0.1 second, and the special variable winning ball is further opened. This is an opening pattern in which the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.1 seconds after the device 22 is closed for 7 seconds. That is, as the control of the first round, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed for 7000 milliseconds, then the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 100 milliseconds, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is further set for 7000 milliseconds. After the closed state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 100 milliseconds. After such control of the first round is completed, the same control as that of the first round is executed in the second round. The interval period of the release pattern B1 (the same applies to the release pattern B2, the release pattern B3, and the release pattern B4) is 0.1 second.

  That is, in the case of the second big hit, as shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the explanation display is ended, the hit notification effect is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the specific port 400, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B1. In other words, if the game ball is not passed through the specific port 400 after the explanation display is completed, the hit notification effect is not executed, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is maintained in the closed state.

  FIG. 17B schematically shows an opening pattern in the big hit gaming state in the case of the third big hit. In the case of the third big hit, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), after the symbol is determined, the explanation display of the game content is performed for a predetermined time as in the case of the first big hit. Note that the length of the predetermined time (display time for explanation display) may be the same as or different from either the first big hit or the second big hit. When the game ball passes through the specific opening 400 after the explanation display is finished, a hit notification effect is executed, and the type of hit (specifically, 2R probability change) is notified in the hit notification effect.

  After completion of the winning notification effect, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled as shown in FIG. 17B according to the opening pattern (opening pattern B2) in the big hit game state of the third jackpot. In the opening pattern B2, for each of the two rounds, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed for 7 seconds, and then the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 0.1 second. This is an opening pattern in which the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.1 seconds after the device 22 is closed for 2 seconds. That is, as the control of the first round, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed for 7000 milliseconds, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 100 milliseconds, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is further opened for 2000 milliseconds. After the closed state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 100 milliseconds. After such control of the first round is completed, the same control as that of the first round is executed in the second round.

  That is, in the case of the third big hit, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), the hit notification effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball passes the specific port 400 after the end of the explanation display, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B2. In other words, if the game ball is not passed through the specific port 400 after the explanation display is completed, the hit notification effect is not executed, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is maintained in the closed state.

  FIG. 17C schematically shows an opening pattern in the big hit gaming state in the case of the fourth big hit. In the case of the fourth big hit, as shown in FIG. 17 (C), after the symbols are determined, the explanation of the game content is displayed for a predetermined time as in the case of the first big hit. The length of the predetermined time (display time for explanation display) may be the same as or different from any of the first big hit, the second big hit, or the third big hit. When the game ball passes through the specific opening 400 after the explanation display is finished, a hit notification effect is executed, and the type of hit (specifically, 2R probability change) is notified in the hit notification effect.

  After the end of the winning notification effect, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled as shown in FIG. 17C according to the opening pattern (opening pattern B3) in the fourth big hit game state. In the opening pattern B3, for each of the two rounds, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 0.1 seconds after the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed for 2 seconds, and the special variable winning ball is further opened. This is an opening pattern in which the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.1 seconds after the device 22 is closed for 7 seconds. That is, as the first round control, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed for 2000 milliseconds, then the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 100 milliseconds, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is further set for 7000 milliseconds. After the closed state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 100 milliseconds. After such control of the first round is completed, the same control as that of the first round is executed in the second round.

  That is, in the case of the fourth big hit, as shown in FIG. 17C, a hit notification effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific port 400 after the explanation display ends, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B3. In other words, if the game ball is not passed through the specific port 400 after the explanation display is completed, the hit notification effect is not executed, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is maintained in the closed state.

  FIG. 17D schematically shows an opening pattern in the big hit gaming state in the case of the fifth big hit. In the case of the fifth big hit, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), after the symbol has been determined, explanation of the game content is displayed for a predetermined time as in the case of the first big hit. The length of the predetermined time (display time for explanation display) may be the same as or different from any of the first big hit, the second big hit, the third big hit, or the fourth big hit. When the game ball passes through the specific opening 400 after the explanation display is finished, a hit notification effect is executed, and the type of hit (specifically, 2R probability change) is notified in the hit notification effect.

  After the end of the winning notification effect, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled as shown in FIG. In the opening pattern B4, for each of the two rounds, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed for 2 seconds and then the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 0.1 second. This is an opening pattern in which the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.1 seconds after the device 22 is closed for 2 seconds. That is, as the control of the first round, after the special variable winning ball device 22 is closed for 2000 milliseconds, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 100 milliseconds, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is further opened for 2000 milliseconds. After the closed state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for 100 milliseconds. After such control of the first round is completed, the same control as that of the first round is executed in the second round.

  That is, in the case of the fifth big hit, as shown in FIG. 17D, a hit notification effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball passes through the specific port 400 after the explanation display ends, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B4. In other words, if the game ball is not passed through the specific port 400 after the explanation display is completed, the hit notification effect is not executed, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is maintained in the closed state.

  FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B schematically show an opening pattern in the small hit gaming state in the case of the first small hit. FIG. 18A shows a case where the game ball passes through the specific port 400 within a predetermined time after the end of the explanation display, and FIG. The case where it did not pass the specific port 400 is represented.

  In the case of the first small hit, as shown in FIG. 18A and FIG. 18B, after the symbols are determined, the explanation of the game content is displayed as in the case of the second big hit. The display time of the explanation display is preferably the same as that of the second big hit, but may be different. When the game ball passes through the specific port 400 before the elapse of the predetermined time after the explanation display ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (A), a hit notification effect is executed. Is a small hit). On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific port 400 after the explanation display ends, a hit notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. Specifically, a small hit) is notified.

  That is, the hit notification effect is executed both when the game ball passes through the specific port 400 before the predetermined time elapses and when the game ball passes through the specific port 400 and the predetermined time elapses. When the game ball passes through the specific port 400 before the elapse of time, the execution disclosure timing of the hit notification effect is earlier than when the predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, even when the game ball passes through the specific port 400 before the elapse of the predetermined time, the game ball does not pass through the specific port 400 and the predetermined time has passed. Even when the time has elapsed, the execution end timing of the predetermined hit notification effect (that is, the start timing of transition to the predetermined small hit gaming state) is the same. In other words, when the game ball passes through the specific port 400 before the predetermined time elapses, the execution time of the hit notification effect is shorter than when the predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400. become longer. The same applies to the second small hit to the fourth small hit.

  Also, a hit notification effect that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific port 400 before the predetermined time elapses, and a hit notification that is executed when the predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400. The execution mode may be different from the production. For example, in the hit notification effect that is executed when a game ball passes the specific opening 400 before a predetermined time elapses, a long version battle effect is executed and the type of the win is notified as a result of the battle, while the game ball is specified. In the hit notification effect that is executed when a predetermined time has passed without passing through the mouth 400, a short version battle effect may be executed to notify the type of winning as a result of the battle.

  After the end of the hit notification effect, the special variable winning ball device 22 is operated in accordance with the opening pattern in the big hit gaming state of the first small hit (the same opening pattern B1 as the second big hit) as shown in FIGS. ) Is controlled.

  As described above, in the case of the first small hit, after the explanation display is finished, when a predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400 (within the predetermined time after the explanation display is finished). When the game ball does not pass through the specific opening 400), as shown in FIG. 18B, when the predetermined time elapses, the hit notification effect starts to be executed, and the predetermined hit notification effect execution ends. The execution of the notification effect is finished, and then the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B1. On the other hand, after the explanation display is finished, when the game ball passes through the specific port 400 within a predetermined time after the explanation display is finished, as shown in FIG. Then, the execution of the notification effect is terminated at the predetermined end timing of execution of the notification effect, and then the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B1.

  FIG. 18C and FIG. 18D schematically show an opening pattern in the small hit gaming state in the case of the third small hit. FIG. 18C shows the case where the game ball passes through the specific port 400 within a predetermined time after the explanation display ends, and FIG. 18D shows the game ball within a predetermined time after the explanation display ends. The case where it did not pass the specific port 400 is represented.

  In the case of the third small hit, as shown in FIG. 18C and FIG. 18D, after the symbols are determined, the explanation of the game content is displayed as in the case of the fourth big hit. The display time for the explanation display is preferably the same as that of the fourth big hit, but may be different. When the game ball passes through the specific port 400 after the explanation display ends and before a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 18C, a hit notification effect is executed. Is a small hit). On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific port 400 after the explanation display is finished and a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Specifically, a small hit) is notified. After the end of the hit notification effect, the special variable winning ball device 22 is shown in FIG. 18 (C) or FIG. 18 (D) according to the release pattern in the big hit game state of the third small hit (the same open pattern B3 as the fourth big hit). ) Is controlled.

  As described above, in the case of the third small hit, after the explanation display ends, when a predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400 (within the predetermined time after the explanation display ends). When the game ball does not pass through the specific opening 400), as shown in FIG. 18D, when the predetermined time elapses, execution of the hit notification effect is started and the execution timing of the predetermined hit notification effect is reached. The execution of the notification effect is finished, and then the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B1. On the other hand, after the explanation display is finished, if the game ball passes through the specific port 400 within a predetermined time after the explanation display is finished, as shown in FIG. Then, the execution of the notification effect is terminated at the end timing of execution of the predetermined hit notification effect, and then the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B3.

  In FIG. 18, the first small hit and the third small hit are described, and the description of the second small hit and the fourth small hit are omitted, but the same applies to the second small hit and the fourth small hit. . For example, in the second small hit, after the explanation display is finished, if a predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400, the execution of the hit notification effect is started when the predetermined time elapses, and within the predetermined time When the game ball passes through the specific port 400, the hit notification effect is started when the game ball passes, and in any case, the notification effect is stopped at the predetermined end timing of the hit notification effect. The variable winning ball device 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B2. Further, in the fourth small hit, when the predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400 after the explanation display is finished, the hit notification effect is started when the predetermined time elapses, and within the predetermined time. When the game ball passes through the specific port 400, the hit notification effect is started when the game ball passes, and in any case, the notification effect is stopped at the predetermined end timing of the hit notification effect. The variable winning ball device 22 is controlled according to the opening pattern B4.

  In addition, it has been described that the release pattern in the small hit game state for the first small hit is the same release pattern B1 as the release pattern for the second big hit, but in the small hit game state for the first small hit, the first round, It is not controlled as a round like the second round, but within the period (within the period of two rounds according to the second big hit opening pattern), 7 seconds closed state → 0.1 second open state → 7 seconds Closed state → 0.1 second open state → 7 second closed state → 0.1 second open state → 7 second closed state → 0.1 second open state. In other words, the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first small hitting game state may be substantially the same as the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second big winning game state. In the following description, it is assumed that the opening pattern in the small hit gaming state for the first small hit is the same as the opening pattern for the second big hit (open pattern B1).

  In addition, it has been described that the release pattern in the small hit game state for the second small hit is the same open pattern B2 as the open pattern for the third big hit, but in the small hit game state for the second small hit, the first round, It is not controlled as a round like the second round, but within the relevant period (within the period of two rounds according to the third big hit opening pattern), 7 seconds closed → 0.1 seconds open → 2 seconds Closed state → 0.1 second open state → 7 second closed state → 0.1 second open state → 2 second closed state → 0.1 second open state. That is, the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second small hitting game state may be substantially the same as the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball device 22 in the third big winning game state. In the following description, it is assumed that the release pattern in the small hit game state for the second small hit is the same as the open pattern for the third big hit (open pattern B2).

  In addition, it has been described that the release pattern in the small hit game state for the third small hit is the same release pattern B3 as the open pattern for the fourth big hit, but in the small hit game state for the third small hit, the first round, It is not controlled as a round like the second round, but within the period (within the period of two rounds according to the fourth big hit opening pattern), the closed state for 2 seconds → the open state for 0.1 second → 7 seconds Closed state → 0.1 second open state → 2 second closed state → 0.1 second open state → 7 second closed state → 0.1 second open state. That is, the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball device 22 in the small hit game state for the third small hit may be substantially the same as the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball device 22 in the big hit game state for the fourth big hit. In the following description, it is assumed that the release pattern in the small hit game state for the third small hit is the same as the open pattern for the fourth big hit (open pattern B3).

  In addition, it has been described that the release pattern in the small hit game state for the fourth small hit is the same release pattern B4 as the release pattern for the fifth big hit, but in the small hit game state for the fourth small hit, the first round, It is not controlled as a round like the second round, but within the period (within the period of two rounds according to the fifth big hit opening pattern), the closed state for 2 seconds → the open state for 0.1 second → 2 seconds Closed state → 0.1 second open state → 2 second closed state → 0.1 second open state → 2 second closed state → 0.1 second open state. That is, the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball device 22 in the small hit game state of the fourth small hit may be substantially the same as the opening / closing operation of the special variable winning ball device 22 in the big hit big hit game state. In the following description, it is assumed that the release pattern in the small hit gaming state for the fourth small hit is the same as the open pattern for the fifth big hit (open pattern B4).

  In this embodiment, the opening patterns in the first round and the second round are the same, but different patterns may be executed. According to this, it becomes difficult to observe the operation pattern of the second round based on the experience of the first round, and the interest is enhanced by the length of the closing time.

  Next, the number of game media (game media existing on the bottom surface member 23) passing over the bottom surface member 23 of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 at a time when there is a big hit game state or a small hit game state will be described. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the game ball firing interval is 0.6 seconds (100 game balls are fired per minute). Further, as described above, it is assumed that the flowing time Ta during which the game ball flows down from the upstream region 23U of the bottom surface member 23 of the special variable winning ball device 22 to the downstream region 23L is 6 seconds.

  As described above, the game ball fired every 0.6 seconds reaches the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23 approximately every 0.6 seconds. Assuming that the game ball reaches the upstream region 23U of the bottom surface member 23 every 0.6 seconds, the game ball passes through the downstream region 23L approximately every 0.6 seconds (finishing down on the bottom surface member 23). That is, for convenience of explanation, all of the launched game balls reach the upstream area 23U of the bottom surface member 23, and variations in the flow path of the game balls and the flow speed of the game area 10 before reaching the upstream area 23U. If the variation is ignored and the variation in the flow path of the game ball on the bottom member 23 and the variation in the flow velocity after arriving at the upstream region 23U are ignored, the game ball fired every 0.6 seconds is 0. It reaches the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23 every 6 seconds and passes through the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23 every 0.6 seconds. Also, since the flow-down time Ta is 6 seconds, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is always in a closed state (if it is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state), the game ball starts to be fired continuously. After the first game ball reaches the upstream area 23U, 10 (6 seconds ÷ 0.6 seconds) game balls exist on the bottom surface member 23. That is, under the conditions as described above, the maximum number of game balls existing on the bottom surface member 23 is ten. In other words, ten game balls can be stored while flowing down on the bottom member 23 (can exist on the bottom member 23).

  When the time (interval period) in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state is 2 seconds or 3 seconds, the maximum number of 10 game balls is within the interval period. It does not accumulate on the bottom member 23. For example, when the interval period of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is 3 seconds, only 5 (3 seconds ÷ 0.6 seconds) gaming balls are stored on the bottom member 23 at most. In addition, when the interval period of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is 2 seconds, only 3 gaming balls (2 seconds ÷ 0.6 seconds rounded down) are stored on the bottom member 23 at most. . That is, in the interval period such as 2 seconds or 3 seconds that is less than the flow-down time (6 seconds), the interval period ends before the maximum number (10) of game balls are stored on the bottom member 23 (in the closed state). Since the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is changed to the open state, the maximum number (10) of game balls cannot be stored on the bottom member 23.

  On the other hand, when the time (interval period) in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state is 7 seconds, the maximum number of 10 game balls in the interval period is the bottom surface. Accumulated on member 23. That is, if it is within an interval period such as 7 seconds that is equal to or greater than the flow-down time (6 seconds), before the interval period ends (before the special variable winning ball device 22 that has been closed transitions to the open state), The maximum number (10) of game balls can be stored on the bottom member 23.

  In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the game balls stored on the bottom member 23 in the closed state immediately before the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened are in the state where the special variable winning ball device 22 is released from the closed state. At the same time, it is possible to make a prize at the big prize opening 24 all at once. Therefore, the player can adjust the number of game balls stored on the bottom surface member 23 by adjusting the launch of the game balls, for example, as necessary, so that more players can be obtained. Become.

  Therefore, for example, when comparing the open pattern B1 and the open pattern B4, all four interval periods in the open pattern B4 are 2000 milliseconds, whereas all four interval periods in the open pattern B1 are 7000 milliseconds. Therefore, the second big hit and the first small hit for which the opening control by the opening pattern B1 is performed are larger than the fifth big hit and the fourth small hit for which the opening control by the opening pattern B4 is performed. Is advantageous to the player.

  Further, for example, in the release pattern B2 and the release pattern B3, two of the four interval periods are 7000 milliseconds, and two are 2000 milliseconds. The second big hit and the third small hit where the opening control by the opening pattern B3 is performed are more advantageous to the player than the second big hit and the first small hit where the opening control by the opening pattern B1 is performed. However, it is more advantageous for the player than the fifth big hit or the fourth small hit where the opening control by the opening pattern B4 is performed.

  Here, in the case of a big hit, the time until the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for one round (first time) after the game ball passes the specific opening 400 (preparation time Tb before opening after passing the specific opening) ). The pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific mouth is the total time of the execution time of the hit notification effect (fixed time) and the time of the closed state (closed time) of one round (first time) (see FIGS. 16 and 17). . In this embodiment, the closing time of one round (first time) differs depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the closing time for one round (first time) at the first big hit is 3 seconds, the closing time for one round (first time) at the second big hit and the third big hit is 7 seconds, The closing time of 1 round (1st round) at the time of 4 big hits and 5th big hit is 2 seconds. Accordingly, the pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific port is a time that differs depending on which closing time (3 seconds, 7 seconds, 2 seconds) is used. For example, the shortest closing time (2 seconds) is used as a reference. Also good. That is, the pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific port may be a time obtained by adding the shortest closing time (2 seconds) to the execution time (fixed time) of the hit notification effect.

  In addition, the pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific port is the time until the game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 reaches (flows down) the downstream region 23L of the bottom member 23 of the special variable winning ball device 22 (after passing through the specific port). Based on the downstream area arrival time Tc). For example, the pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific port may be the downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port. That is, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened for one round (first time) at a timing when the game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 reaches (flows down) the upstream region 23U of the bottom surface member 23. May be.

  Specifically, the shape, arrangement position and quantity of the restriction pieces 118, the inclination of the bottom member 23, the game area 10 so that the pre-opening preparation time Tb after passage through the specific opening becomes the downstream area arrival time Tc after passage through the specific opening. The arrangement position of the specific opening 400, the nail in the flow path from the specific opening 400 to the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23, the execution time of the hit notification effect, and the like may be determined. Note that the downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port is the time until the game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 reaches (flows down) the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23 of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the upstream region 23U. Is a time (average time, predicted time) that is added to the flow time Ta flowing down to the downstream region 23L. That is, the shape, arrangement position and quantity of the restriction piece 118, the inclination of the bottom surface member 23, the arrangement position of the specific port 400, the nail in the flow path from the specific port 400 to the upstream region 23U of the bottom surface member 23, hit notification effect The pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific port and the downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port may be adjusted in advance.

  For example, when the downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port is 8 seconds (the time until the game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 reaches (flows down) the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23 of the special variable winning ball device 22) Is 2 seconds and the flow-down time Ta is 6 seconds), and the execution time of the hit notification effect (fixed time) is 6 seconds so that the pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific port is 8 seconds. Also good. If the closing time (2 seconds) is added to the execution time (6 seconds) of the hit notification effect, the pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific mouth is 8 seconds. If the flow time Ta is 6 seconds or longer, the maximum number (10) of game balls can be stored on the bottom member 23 as described above. The same applies to the small hit.

  Next, a case where a small hit will be described. In the case of a small hit, as described above, even when the game ball passes through the specific port 400 before the predetermined time elapses (when it passes before reaching the latest notification timing), the game ball passes through the specific port 400. Even when the predetermined time has passed without passing (when the latest notification timing is reached without passing), the hit notification effect is executed, and the state shifts to the small hit gaming state from the predetermined transition start timing thereafter. The game ball passes through the specific opening 400 during the time from the latest notification timing until the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for the first round (first time). It is the total time of the execution time (fixed time) of the hit effect when the predetermined time elapses and the time (closed time) of the closed state of one round (first time) (see FIG. 18). In this embodiment, the closing time of one round (first time) differs depending on the type of small hits. Specifically, the closing time of one round (first time) at the time of the first small hit and the second small hit is 7 seconds, and one round (the first time) at the time of the third small hit and the fourth small hit The closing time is 2 seconds. Accordingly, the pre-opening preparation time Td after non-passage notification varies depending on which closing time (7 seconds, 2 seconds) is used. For example, the shortest closing time (2 seconds) may be used as a reference. That is, the pre-opening preparation time Td after non-passing notification is the shortest closing time (2 seconds) to the execution time (fixed time) of the hit effect when the predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400 ).

  The pre-opening preparation time Td after non-passage notification may be a time based on the downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port. For example, the pre-opening preparation time Td after non-passage notification may be the downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port. That is, it is specially variable at a timing at which the game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 reaches (falls down) the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23 immediately after the lapse of a predetermined time (immediately after the execution of the hit notification effect is started). The winning ball device 22 may be in an open state for one round (first time). The pre-opening preparation time Td after non-passage notification is a time based on the case where the game ball does not pass through the specific port 400, and the downstream region arrival time Tc after the specific port is used as a reference time.

  In determining the pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific port, other closing times (3 seconds, 7 seconds) may be adopted as the closing time of one round (first time), but the shortest closing time ( 2 seconds) (that is, by adopting the shortest pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific port), the game ball that first passes through the specific port 400 is in the open state for one round (first time). It is possible to prevent the downstream area 23L from flowing down before it becomes as much as possible. Further, when determining the pre-opening preparation time Td after the non-passage notification, the case where the execution of the notification effect is started not at the latest notification timing but at the passage timing of the specific port 400 may be adopted. (I.e., by adopting the shortest pre-opening preparation time Td before opening notification before adopting the shortest non-passing notification pre-opening preparation time Td, the downstream region 23L has been made to flow down before being opened in the first round (first time)) Can be prevented as much as possible.

  FIGS. 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 11 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 11 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C0A (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. The effect control microcomputer 200 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C0A (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C0A (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 200 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result of the symbol.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (explanation screen end designation command) for designating that display of the explanation screen is ended (explanation display is terminated), that is, that the specific port 400 is made effective.

  Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (operation gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the specific opening (operation gate) 400.

  The command A011 (H) displays a fanfare screen (also referred to as a hit notification screen) of the first big hit (15R probability change), that is, an effect control command (a big hit start 1 designation command for designating the start of the first big hit game) : Jackpot fanfare 1 designation command). Command A012 (H) displays the fanfare screen of the second big hit (2R accuracy change), the third big hit (2R accuracy change), the fourth big hit (2R accuracy change), and the fifth big hit (2R accuracy change), that is, the second big hit. ~ The effect control command for designating the start of any one of the big hit games (big hit start 2 designation command: big hit fanfare 2 designation command). Command A013 (H) displays a fanfare screen for the first small hit, the second small hit, the third small hit, and the fourth small hit, that is, any one of the first small hit to the fourth small hit This is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command: small hit fanfare specifying command) for specifying the start of the game.

  The command A1XX (H) is a production control command (special prize opening closing time designation command: large) that designates that the round is the number of times indicated by XX or that the time indicated by XX is the closing time of the special prize opening 24. Command after opening the winning opening). As shown in FIG. 20 (A), the value indicating the number of rounds and the closing time (interval period) is set in the EXT data and transmitted as the special winning opening closing time designation command.

  The command A2XX (H) is a round of the number of times indicated by XX, and an effect control command (special winning opening opening time designation command: large) that designates the time indicated by XX as the opening time of the special winning opening 24. Command for opening a prize opening). As shown in FIG. 20B, the special winning opening opening time designation command is transmitted with the number of rounds and a value for designating the opening time set in the EXT data.

  The command A301 (H) displays an ending screen for the first jackpot (15R probability change), that is, an effect control command for designating the end of the first jackpot jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: a jackpot ending 1 designation command) It is. Command A302 (H) displays the ending screen of the second big hit (2R positive change), the third big hit (2R positive change), the fourth big hit (2R positive change), and the fifth big hit (2R positive change), that is, the second big hit. It is an effect control command (big hit end 2 designation command: big hit ending 2 designation command) that designates the end of any big hit game of the fifth big hit. Command A303 (H) displays an ending screen for the first small hit, the second small hit, the third small hit, and the fourth small hit, that is, any one of the first small hit to the fourth small hit This is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command: small hit ending specifying command) for specifying the end of the game. Note that a period during which the ending screen is displayed (period in which the ending effect is executed) is also referred to as an ending period.

  Command A 500 (H) is an effect control command (effect gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the effect gate 34.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 40. Then, the display state of the effect display device 11 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 12a or the second special symbol display 12b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200. In addition, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits to the effect control microcomputer 200 an effect gate passage designation command that designates that the game ball has passed through the effect gate 34 every time the game ball passes through the effect gate 34. To do.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 40 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 200 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the change pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (change) of the effect symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 12a and the second special symbol. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 12b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the production parts such as the device 11, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the production control microcomputer 200 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIGS. 21 and 22 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S28) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 40. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol indicator 12a or the second special symbol indicator 12b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 determines that the first start opening switch 14a or the second start opening switch 15a is on (step S314; Yes), that is, the start winning or second start to the first start winning opening 13a. If the start winning to the winning opening 13b has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is executed (step S315). If neither the first start port switch 14a nor the second start port switch 15a is on (step S314; No), the start port switch passing process is not executed.

  Subsequently, if the effect gate switch 34a is on (step S316; Yes), that is, if a game ball has passed through the effect gate 34, the CPU 56 transmits an effect gate passage designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Control is performed (step S317). If the effect gate switch 34a is not on (step S316; No), the above control is not performed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 56 performs any one of steps S300 to S312 according to the internal state. The processes in steps S300 to S312 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 200 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 11 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the big hit start pre-processing start timer is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the small hit start pre-processing start timer is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 42), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Pre-hit start process (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. When the timer set in the special symbol stop process (process start timer before jackpot start) times out, an explanation screen end designation command is transmitted. Subsequently, when the game ball passes through the specific port 400, an operation gate passage designation command or a jackpot start designation command is transmitted. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 24) is initialized and the solenoid 106 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S307. It should be noted that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 200, a process for confirming that the closing condition of the special winning opening 24 is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening 24 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308.

  Big hit end process (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed to cause the production control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Pre-start process for small hits (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. When the timer set in the special symbol stop process (process start timer before the small hit start) times out, an explanation screen end designation command is transmitted. Subsequently, when the game ball passes through the specific mouth 400 within a predetermined time, an operation gate passage designation command or a small hit start designation command is transmitted, and the game ball does not pass through the specific mouth 400 within the predetermined time. In this case, a small hit start designation command is transmitted. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 24) is initialized and the solenoid 106 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S311 (in this example, 11 (decimal number)). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening 24 is opened during the small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S311): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 11. Processing for confirming the closing condition of the special winning opening 24 is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening 24 is satisfied and the number of times of opening of the big prize opening 24 still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S310 (10 in this example). ). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S312 (in this example, 12 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end processing (step S312): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 12. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 200 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S315. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 14a is in an ON state (step S211). If the first start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S217. If the first start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S217.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 60 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 24) (step S215). . In the process of step S215, random R (random number for determining special figure display result), random 1 (random number for determining big hit type / small hit type), random 2 (random number for determining variation pattern type) and random 3 (variation pattern) Random numbers for determination) are extracted and stored in the storage area. Random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) and random 3 (variation pattern determination random number) are not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning a prize). You may make it extract at the time of the change start of 1 special symbol. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a random number counter for determining a random pattern for generating random 2 or determines a variable pattern for generating random 3 in a variable pattern setting process to be described later. The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter for use.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 24, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer have a random R (random number for determining a special figure display result) that is a hardware random number and a random 1 (a big hit type / small hit) that is a software random number. Type determination random number), random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) and random 3 (variation pattern determination random number) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 15a is in an on state (step S217). If the second start port switch 15a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 15a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step S218). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S219), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S220). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 60 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 24) (step S221). . Note that in the process of step S221, random R (a special figure display result determination random number) that is a hardware random number, random 1 (a big hit type / small hit type determination random number) that is a software random number, random 2 (a variation pattern type) Random number for determination) and random number 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) are extracted and stored in the storage area. Random 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) and random 3 (variation pattern determination random number) are not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning a prize). You may make it extract at the time of the change start of 2 special symbols. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a random number counter for determining a random pattern for generating random 2 or determines a variable pattern for generating random 3 in a variable pattern setting process to be described later. The value may be directly extracted from the random number counter for use.

Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S222).

  25 and 26 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 200 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 according to the current gaming state (step S60). For example, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. For example, if neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the background designation command is transmitted every time for each variation. Only when the state changes, a background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of transmissions of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 200, the CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) according to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S30). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 200 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed with respect to the first start winning opening 13a, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed with respect to the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 13b. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S312 can be made common between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (random number for determining a special figure display result) from the random number buffer area, and executes a big hit / small hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the special figure display result determination random numbers extracted in steps S215 and S221 of the start port passing process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer. Make a decision. The big hit / small hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 14) determined in advance with the random number for determining the special figure display result, and if they match, the big hit / small hit is determined. This is a program for executing the process to be determined. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the big-hit / small-hit determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability that a big hit will be higher than when the gaming state is a non-probable change state (normal game state and short-time state) (See FIG. 14). The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state, and whether or not the fluctuation special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the gaming state or the fluctuation special figure. To decide whether to make a "big hit". Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state and the fluctuation special figure is special figure 1, the CPU 56 uses the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Or “out”. Further, when the game state is the normal state and the fluctuation special figure is special figure 2, the CPU 56 uses the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Decide whether to hit or not. Further, when the gaming state is a probable change state and the fluctuation special figure is special figure 1, the CPU 56 uses the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Is determined. Further, when the game state is a probable change state and the fluctuation special figure is special figure 2, the CPU 56 uses the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. Decide whether to hit or not.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and when the big hit is determined, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Reset at timing. Also, the confirmation whether the fluctuation special figure is special figure 1 or special figure 2 is performed depending on whether the special symbol pointer indicates "first" or "second".

  The CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random R (random number for determining the special figure display result) matches any jackpot determination value (step S61). When the value of the random R matches any jackpot determination value (step S61; Yes), it is determined to be a jackpot, and the process proceeds to step S71. In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the random R value extracted in steps S215 and S221 of the start port switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and compares it with the jackpot determination value. Also, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol display a big hit symbol But there is.

  If the value of the random R (random number for determining the special figure display result) does not match any jackpot determination value (step S61; No), the CPU 56 matches the value of the random R to any jackpot determination value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S62). If the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values (step S62; Yes), it is determined to be a small hit and the process proceeds to step S63. Note that determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but determining whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol display a small hit symbol It is also to do.

  If the value of random R (random number for determining the special figure display result) does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (step S62; No), that is, if it is out of place, it remains as it is. Control goes to step S75.

  In step S71 after determining that it is a big hit, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step S71). Then, the big hit type determination table used to determine the big hit type as one of a plurality of types is selected (step S72). The CPU 56 confirms whether the fluctuation special chart is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and selects the jackpot type determination table corresponding to the fluctuation special figure. Specifically, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15A when the fluctuation special figure is special figure 1, and when the fluctuation special figure is special figure 2, the CPU 56 selects FIG. 15B. The indicated jackpot type determination table is selected.

  Next, using the selected jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 1 (random number for determining the jackpot type / small jackpot type) stored in the random number buffer area. (Step S73). When the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 15B is used (when the fluctuation special figure is special figure 2), one of “first big hit” to “fifth big hit” is determined. When the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15A is used (when the variation special chart is special chart 1), “first jackpot” is always determined. Further, in this case, the CPU 56 reads out the random 1 value extracted in steps S215 and S221 of the start opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and the determination value of each jackpot type Compare with

  Next, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “first big hit (15R probability variation)”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “second big hit (2R probability variation)”, the big hit type is selected. “02” is set as the data to be displayed, and when the big hit type is “third big hit (2R probability change)”, “03” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and the big hit type is “fourth big hit (2R probability change)”. "04" is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and "05" is set as data indicating the jackpot type when the jackpot type is "Fifth jackpot (2R probability variation)".

  On the other hand, in step S63 after determining that a small hit is made, the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63). Then, the small hit type determination table used for determining the small hit type as one of a plurality of types is selected (step S64). In this embodiment, since there is one small hit type determination table (the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 15C), the CPU 56 selects the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 15C. To do.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected small hit type determination table to determine a type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of random 1 (random number for determining big hit type / small hit type) stored in the random number buffer area. (Step S65). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the random 1 value extracted in steps S215 and S221 of the start-port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer, and determines the respective small hit types. Compare with the value.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined small hit type in the small hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S66). For example, when the small hit type is “first small hit”, “11” is set as data indicating the small hit type, and when the small hit type is “second small hit”, data indicating the small hit type Is set as “12”, when the small hit type is “third small hit”, “13” is set as data indicating the small hit type, and when the small hit type is “fourth small hit” “14” is set as data indicating the small hit type.

  Following any of step S74, step S66, and step S62 (No), the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, for example, any one of “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”, which becomes a big hit symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type, is a special symbol. The stop symbol is determined. In other words, when “first big hit (15R probability variation)” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “second big hit (2R probability variation)” is determined, “1” is determined. When the special symbol is determined to be a stop symbol and “3rd big hit (2R probability change)” is determined, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol and “4th big hit (2R probability change)” is determined. “5” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “5 big hit (2R probability change)” is determined, “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, for example, any one of “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. In other words, when “1st small hit” is determined, “2” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “second small hit” is determined, “4” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “3rd small hit” is determined, “6” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “4th small hit” is determined, “8” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. To do.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (set) to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S80). If the big hit flag is set (step S80; Yes), the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the big hit type. One of the pattern type determination tables is selected (step S81). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S80; No), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S82). When the small hit flag is set (step S82; Yes), the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected (step S83). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  When the small hit flag is not set (step S82; No), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (step S84). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state (including the time of shifting to the probability change state), and is reset when the time reduction state is ended. Specifically, it is determined to be a big hit (first big hit, second big hit, third big hit, fourth big hit, fifth big hit), set in the process of ending the big hit game, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 Times) and when it is determined to be a big hit (first big hit, second big hit, third big hit, fourth big hit, fifth big hit), the special symbol change display will end and stop It is reset when the symbol is stopped and displayed. If the time reduction flag is set (step S84; Yes), the CPU 56 uses the deviation variation pattern type determination table (probability change / time reduction) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. Is selected (step S85). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  If the time reduction flag is not set (step S84; No), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S86). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (step S86; No), the CPU 56 uses a variation pattern type determination table for detachment (normally) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected (step S87). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S86; Yes), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. (For shortening) is selected (step S88). Then, control goes to a step S89.

  In this embodiment, the process of steps S84 to S88 is executed, and when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the deviation variation pattern type determination table (for shortening) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state is the time-short state (including the case where the probability variation state is included), the deviation variation pattern type determination table (probability variation / time-shortening) is selected. In this case, the variation pattern type for shortening variation may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S89 described later, and when the variation pattern type for shortening variation is determined, the variation is performed in the process of step S91. A variation pattern of shortening variation is determined as a pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time state (including the case where the probability variation state is included) or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be performed. .

  In this embodiment, the case where the variation pattern type determination table for probability variation / time reduction used in the time reduction state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening based on the number of reserved storages are different tables is shown. A common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for variation.

  Even if the gaming state is a short-time state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), a variation display of the shortening variation is performed. It may not be possible. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Yes in step S84, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. A determination table (for normal use) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random 2 (random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S81, S83, S85, S87, or S88. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S89). In the case where the random number 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for generating the random number 2 (variation pattern type determination random number). A value may be directly extracted from the random number counter for use, and the variation pattern type may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses a hit variation pattern determination table and a deviation variation pattern determination table as tables used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S89. One of them is selected (step S90). Further, the random pattern 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is read out from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S90. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S91). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating random 3 (variation pattern determination random number). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S92). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S93).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S94). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S95).

  In the case where it is determined as “displacement”, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to make a reach through a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. . Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S84 to S88, S89 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 selects any one of the display results 1 to 10 according to the determined big hit type (big hit type), small hit type (small hit type), and the difference. Control for transmitting the effect control command (see FIG. 19). Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S101).

  When the big hit flag is set (step S101; Yes), depending on the big hit type (first big hit, second big hit, third big hit, fourth big hit, fifth big hit) Control is performed to transmit one of the display result 6 designation commands (step S102). Specifically, the CPU 56 confirms the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal process, and if “01” is set in the big hit type buffer, the display result 2 for designating the first big hit Sends a specified command. If “02” is set in the jackpot type buffer, a display result 3 designation command is sent to specify the second jackpot. If “03” is set in the jackpot type buffer, the third jackpot is sent. Display result 4 designating command is sent, and if "04" is set in the jackpot type buffer, a display result 5 designating command specifying the fourth jackpot is sent, and "05" is set in the jackpot type buffer. If so, a display result 6 designation command designating the fifth big hit is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S110.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S101; No), it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S107).

  When the small hit flag is set (step S107; Yes), the display result 7 is designated according to the small hit type (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit, fourth small hit). Control to transmit any of the command to the display result 10 designation command is performed (step S108). Specifically, the CPU 56 checks the data set in the small hit type buffer in step S66 of the special symbol normal process, and designates the first small hit if “11” is set in the small hit type buffer. If the display result 7 designation command is transmitted and “12” is set in the small hit type buffer, the display result 8 designation command for specifying the second small hit type is transmitted, and “13” is set in the small hit type buffer. If so, a display result 9 designation command designating the third small hit is transmitted, and if “14” is set in the small hit type buffer, a display result 10 designation command designating the fourth small hit is transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S110.

  When the small hit flag is not set (step S107; No), that is, when it is “out of”, the CPU 56 transmits a display result 1 designation command (step S109). Then, the process proceeds to step S110.

  Following any of step S102, step S108, and step S109, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S110).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not a pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S122 described later. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  Next, if the reserved memory number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S125). When the variation time timer times out (step S126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process.

  In FIG. 30, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). When the big hit flag is set (step S131; Yes), the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag indicating the probability change state and the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state (step S132). If it is set, the probability variation counter and the short-time counter are also reset. Note that the probability variation counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol has changed in the probability variation state (the number of special game games used). The time reduction counter is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the time reduction state (the number of special game games consumed).

  Subsequent to step S132, the CPU 56 sets (sets) a predetermined value in the jackpot start pre-processing start timer (step S136). The jackpot start pre-processing start timer is a timer for measuring the time until the explanation screen end designation command is transmitted in the jackpot start pre-processing (the time during which the description of the game content is continuously displayed). Subsequent to step S136, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit start pre-processing (step S305) (step S138).

  When the big hit flag is not set in step S131 (step S131; No), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (step S141a). If the value of the probability variation counter is not 0 (step S141a; No), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the probability variation counter by -1 (step S141b). When the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S142a; Yes), the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag (step S142b).

  Following any of step S141a (Yes), step S142a (No), and step S142b, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S143a). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S143a; No), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by -1 (step S143b). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S144a; Yes), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (step S144b).

  Following any of step S143a (Yes), step S144a (No), and step S144b, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). When the small hit flag is set (step S145; Yes), the CPU 56 sets (sets) a predetermined value in the small hit start pre-processing start timer (step S146). The big hit pre-start process start timer is a timer for measuring the time until the explanation screen end designation command is transmitted in the small hit pre-start process (the time during which the description of the game content is continuously displayed). Subsequent to step S146, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S309) (step S148).

  When the small hit flag is not set (step S145; No), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S149).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the big hit start pre-processing (step S305). FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are explanatory diagrams showing an opening / closing time table in which opening / closing times for opening control in the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 are set. The opening / closing time table may be stored in the RAM 55 or the like.

  In FIG. 31, when the jackpot start pre-processing start timer has not timed out (when the value of the jackpot start pre-processing start timer is not 0) (step S1300; No), the jackpot start pre-processing The value of the start timer is decremented by 1 (step S1301). On the other hand, when the jackpot start pre-processing start timer has timed out (when the jackpot start pre-processing start timer value is 0) (step S1300; Yes), the CPU 56 performs the effect control microcomputer 200. To transmit an explanation screen end designation command (step S1302).

  Subsequent to step S1302, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the specific port switch 400a is on (step S1306). If the specific port switch 400a is not on (step S1306; No), the process returns to step S1306. If the specific port switch 400a is in the ON state (step S1306; Yes), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an operation gate passage designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1307).

  Subsequent to step S1307, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command corresponding to the jackpot type to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1308). Specifically, when the jackpot type is the first jackpot (15R probability variation), the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start 1 designation command. When the big hit type is any one of the second big hit (2R positive change), the third big hit (2R positive change), the fourth big hit (2R positive change), and the fifth big hit (2R positive change), the CPU 56 starts the big hit 2 Send the specified command. Whether the jackpot type is the first jackpot to the fifth jackpot is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU 56 sets 1 in a round number counter indicating the number of rounds (step S1309). In addition, the CPU 56 sets 1 to a multiple release counter that counts the number of times the same round is released when multiple releases are made in the same round (step S1310).

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a special winning opening closing time designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1311). Specifically, a special winning opening closing time designation command corresponding to the open / close time table corresponding to the big hit type or the value of the round counter (specifically, the value “1”) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200. Take control.

  More specifically, when the big hit type is the first big hit, it is the first round based on the open / close time table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the first big hit and the value “1” of the round number counter. And a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “01” is set in the EXT data, which designates that the first closing time (3 seconds) is the closing time (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 1 in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first jackpot shown in FIG. 33 is 3 seconds.

  The opening / closing time table shown in FIG. 33 is an opening / closing time table corresponding to the first big hit (15R probability variation). In the opening / closing time table shown in FIG. 33, a closing time (interval period) and an opening time corresponding to the opening pattern A (see FIG. 16) of the first big hit game state are set. Thereby, the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 by the opening / closing pattern A is realized.

  When the big hit type is the second big hit, the first round is based on the open / close time table corresponding to the second big hit (see FIG. 34A) and the value “1” of the round number counter. And a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “03” is set in the EXT data to designate that the third closing time (7 seconds) is the closing time (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second jackpot shown in FIG. 34 (A) is 7 seconds. In the second big hit, there are two closed states in each round, but since this process (step S1311) is executed before the first closing of the first round is performed, this process (step S1311). Now, the closing time of round 1 (first time) is referred to in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second jackpot shown in FIG.

  The opening / closing time table shown in FIG. 34A is an opening / closing time table corresponding to the second big hit (2R probability variation) and the first small hit. In the opening / closing time table shown in FIG. 34 (A), the release pattern B1 (FIG. 17 (A), FIG. 18 (A), FIG. 18) of the big hit game state of the second big hit or the first big hit game state. A closing time (interval period) and an opening time corresponding to (see (B)) are set. Thereby, the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 by the opening / closing pattern B1 is realized.

  Further, when the big hit type is the third big hit, it is the first round based on the open / close time table corresponding to the third big hit (see FIG. 34B) and the value “1” of the round number counter. And a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “03” is set in the EXT data to designate that the third closing time (7 seconds) is the closing time (see FIG. 20A). In addition, the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the third big hit shown in FIG. 34 (B) is 7 seconds. In the third big hit, there are two closed states in each round, but this processing (step S1311) is executed before the first closing of the first round, so this processing (step S1311). Now, the closing time of round 1 (first time) is referred to in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the third big hit shown in FIG.

  The open / close time table shown in FIG. 34B is an open / close time table corresponding to the third big hit (2R probability variation) and the second small hit. In the opening / closing time table shown in FIG. 34 (B), the closing time (interval) corresponding to the release pattern B2 (see FIG. 17 (B)) of the third big hit big hit gaming state and the second big hit big hit gaming state. Period) and opening time are set. Thereby, the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 by the opening / closing pattern B2 is realized.

  When the big hit type is the fourth big hit, the fact that it is the first round based on the open / close time table (see FIG. 34C) corresponding to the fourth big hit and the value “1” of the round number counter. A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “02” is set in the EXT data is transmitted to designate that the second closing time (2 seconds) is the closing time (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fourth big hit shown in FIG. 34C is 2 seconds. In the fourth big hit, there are two closed states in each round, but this processing (step S1311) is executed before the first closing of the first round, so this processing (step S1311). Now, the closing time of round 1 (first time) is referred to in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fourth big hit shown in FIG.

  The opening / closing time table shown in FIG. 34C is an opening / closing time table corresponding to the fourth big hit (2R probability variation) and the third small hit. In the opening / closing time table shown in FIG. 34 (C), the release pattern B3 (FIG. 17 (C), FIG. 18 (C), FIG. 18 for the fourth big hit game state or the third small hit game state is shown. A closing time (interval period) and an opening time corresponding to (D) are set. Thereby, the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 by the opening / closing pattern B3 is realized.

  Further, when the big hit type is the fifth big hit, it is the first round based on the open / close time table corresponding to the fifth big hit (see FIG. 34D) and the value “1” of the round number counter. A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “02” is set in the EXT data is transmitted to designate that the second closing time (2 seconds) is the closing time (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fifth big hit shown in FIG. 34 (D) is 2 seconds. In the fifth big hit, there are two closed states in each round, but since this process (step S1311) is executed before the first closing of the first round is performed, this process (step S1311). Now, the closing time of round 1 (first time) is referred to in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fifth big hit shown in FIG.

  The open / close time table shown in FIG. 34D is an open / close time table corresponding to the fifth big hit (2R probability variation) and the fourth small hit. In the opening / closing time table shown in FIG. 34 (D), the closing time (interval) corresponding to the release pattern B4 (see FIG. 17 (D)) of the fifth big hit big hit gaming state and the fourth big hit big hit gaming state. Period) and opening time are set. Thereby, the opening control of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 by the opening / closing pattern B4 is realized.

  Subsequent to step S1311, the CPU 56 sets (sets) the closing time of the opening control in the special variable winning ball device 22 in the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S1312). The timer before opening the big winning opening (also referred to as a closing time timer) is a timer for measuring the time until the big winning opening is opened in the big hit game or the small hit game. Specifically, the predetermined execution time (fixed time) of the hit notification effect, the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit type, and the time corresponding to the value of the round number counter are set as the closing time in the timer before opening the big prize opening. .

  More specifically, when the jackpot type is the first jackpot, the closing time (3 seconds) of round 1 in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the first jackpot is set as the predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect. The added time is set in the timer before opening the grand prize opening. Therefore, for example, if the predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect is X seconds, (X + 3) seconds are set in the pre-winner opening timer.

  When the big hit type is the second big hit, the closing time of the round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34A) corresponding to the second big hit is given at a predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect (see FIG. 34A). 7 seconds) is added. Therefore, for example, if the predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect is Y seconds, (Y + 7) seconds are set in the pre-winner opening timer.

  When the big hit type is the third big hit, the closing time of the round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34B) corresponding to the third big hit is given at the predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect (see FIG. 34B). 7 seconds) is added. Therefore, for example, if the predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect is Y seconds, (Y + 7) seconds are set in the pre-winner opening timer.

  Also, when the big hit type is the fourth big hit, the closing time of the round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34C) corresponding to the fourth big hit at the predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect ( 2) is added. Therefore, for example, if the predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect is Y seconds, (Y + 2) seconds are set in the pre-winner opening timer.

  When the big hit type is the fifth big hit, the closing time of the round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34D) corresponding to the fifth big hit is given at the predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect. 2) is added. Therefore, for example, if the predetermined execution time of the hit notification effect is Y seconds, (Y + 2) seconds are set in the pre-winner opening timer.

  Subsequent to step S1312, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening release pre-processing (step S306) (step S1313). In addition, according to the special symbol stop process (S304) and the big hit start pre-processing (S304), when the big hit is made (step S131; Yes), the big winning opening is opened through the big hit pre-start process (S304). The process proceeds to pre-processing (step S306) (see step S1313). In this case, an explanation screen end designation command, an operation gate passage designation command, a big hit start designation command (big hit start 1 designation command, or big hit start) 2 designation command) and a special prize opening closing time designation command (designation command after opening the special prize opening) are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (see steps S1302, S1307, S1308, and S1311).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start pre-process (step S309). In FIG. 32, when the small hit start pre-processing start timer has not timed out (when the value of the small hit start pre-processing start timer is not 0) (step S1350; No), The value of the pre-start process start timer is decremented by 1 (step S1351). On the other hand, when the small hitting start pre-processing start timer has timed out (when the value of the small hitting pre-processing start timer is 0) (step S1350; Yes), the CPU 56 performs the effect control micro. Control is performed to transmit an instruction screen end designation command to the computer 200 (step S1352).

  Subsequent to step S1352, the CPU 56 sets (sets) a predetermined value in the specific port passage timer (step S1353). The specific port passage timer is a time until a small hit start designation command is transmitted when there is no passage of the game ball through the specific port 400 (until a notification effect is started when the game ball does not pass through the specific port 400. This is a timer for measuring the time. When the specific mouth passage timer has not timed out (when the value of the specific mouth passage timer is not 0) (step S1354; No), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the specific mouth passage timer by −1 (step S1354). S1355).

  Subsequent to step S1355, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the specific port switch 400a is in an on state (step S1356). If the specific port switch 400a is not on (step S1356; No), the process returns to step S1354. If the specific port switch 400a is in the ON state (step S1356; Yes), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an operation gate passage designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1307).

  When the specific mouth passage timer has timed out (step S1354; Yes), or following step S1357, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hitting start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1358). . Specifically, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit start designation command regardless of whether the small hit type is any one of the first small hit, the second small hit, the third small hit, and the fourth small hit.

  Subsequent to step S1358, the CPU 56 sets 1 in a round number counter indicating the number of rounds (step S1359). In addition, the CPU 56 sets 1 to a multiple release counter that counts the number of releases in the same round when multiple releases are performed in the same round (step S1360).

  Subsequent to step S1360, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a special winning opening closing time designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1361). Specifically, a special winning opening closing time designation command corresponding to the opening / closing time table corresponding to the small hit type or the value of the round number counter (specifically, the value “1”) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200. Control.

  More specifically, when the small hit type is the first small hit, based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first small hit (see FIG. 34A) and the value “1” of the round number counter, A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “03” is set in EXT data for designating that the first round and the third closing time (7 seconds) are set as the closing time is transmitted (FIG. 20A). reference). Note that the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first small hit shown in FIG. 34 (A) is 7 seconds. In the first small hit, there are two closed states in each round, but since this process (step S 1361) is executed before the first closing of the first round is performed, this process (S 1361). Now, the closing time of round 1 (first time) is referred to in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first small hit shown in FIG.

  When the small hit type is the second small hit, the first round is based on the open / close time table corresponding to the second small hit (see FIG. 34B) and the value “1” of the round number counter. And a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “03” is set in the EXT data for designating that the closing time is the third closing time (7 seconds) (see FIG. 20A). In addition, the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second small hit shown in FIG. 34B is 7 seconds. Note that in the second small hit, there are two closed states in each round, but since this process (step S 1361) is executed before the first closing of the first round is performed, this process (step S 1361). ) Refers to the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second small hit shown in FIG.

  When the small hit type is the third small hit, the first round is based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the third small hit (see FIG. 34C) and the value “1” of the round number counter. And a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “02” is set in the EXT data, which designates that the closing time is the second closing time (2 seconds) (see FIG. 20A). In addition, the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the third small hit shown in FIG. 34C is 2 seconds. In the third small hit, there are two closed states in each round, but since this process (step S 1361) is executed before the first closing of the first round is performed, this process (step S 1361). ) Refers to the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the third small hit shown in FIG.

  When the small hit type is the fourth small hit, the first round is based on the open / close time table corresponding to the fourth small hit (see FIG. 34D) and the value “1” of the round number counter. And a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “02” is set in the EXT data, which designates that the closing time is the second closing time (2 seconds) (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fourth small hit shown in FIG. 34 (D) is 2 seconds. In the fourth small hit, there are two closed states in each round, but since this process (step S 1361) is executed before the first closing of the first round is performed, this process (step SS 1361). ) Refers to the closing time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fourth small hit shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S 1361, the CPU 56 sets (sets) the closing time of the opening control in the special variable winning ball device 22 in the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S 1362). The timer before opening the big winning opening is a timer for measuring the time until the big winning opening is released in the big hit game or the small hit game. Specifically, the time for performing the hit notification effect according to the value of the specific mouth passing timer, the opening / closing time table corresponding to the small hit type, and the time corresponding to the value of the round number counter as the closing time before opening the big prize opening Set to timer. The execution time of the hit notification effect according to the value of the specific mouth passage timer is the initial time (execution time when the value of the specific mouth passage timer is zero, that is, execution when starting from the latest notification timing) Time) plus the value of the specific mouth passage timer.

  More specifically, when the small hit type is the first small hit type, the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first small hit is shown in the execution time of the hit notification effect according to the value of the specific mouth passing timer (FIG. 34A). Set the time after adding the closing time (7 seconds) of round 1 (first time) in (see). Therefore, for example, if the initial time is T seconds and the value of the specific mouth passing timer is Z seconds, (T + Z + 7) seconds are set in the pre-winner opening timer. That is, when the game ball times out without passing through the specific opening 400 (step S1354; Yes), the value of the specific opening passage timer is 0 seconds, so that the timer before opening the big winning opening is (T + 7) seconds. Is set, and when the game ball passes through the specific opening 400 Z seconds before time-out (step S1356; Yes), (T + Z + 7) seconds are set in the timer before opening the big winning opening. In other words, regardless of whether the timing of passing through the specific opening 400 is different or not, the timer before opening the big prize opening is set so that the execution end timing of the hit notification effect is the same. doing. The same applies when the small hit type is the second small hit type.

  In addition, when the small hit type is the second small hit type, in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34B) corresponding to the second small hit, the execution time of the hit notification effect according to the value of the specific mouth passage timer. Set the time after adding the closing time (7 seconds) of round 1 (first time). Therefore, for example, if the initial time is T seconds and the value of the specific mouth passing timer is Z seconds, (T + Z + 7) seconds are set in the pre-winner opening timer.

  When the small hit type is the third small hit type, the execution time of the hit notification effect according to the value of the specific mouth passage timer is set in the open / close time table corresponding to the third small hit (see FIG. 34C). Set the time after adding the closing time (2 seconds) of round 1 (first time). Therefore, for example, if the initial time is T seconds and the value of the specific mouth passage timer is Z seconds, (T + Z + 2) seconds are set in the pre-winner opening timer. In other words, when the game ball times out without passing through the specific opening 400 (step S1354; Yes), the value of the specific opening passage timer is 0 seconds, so that the timer before opening the big winning opening is (T + 2) seconds. Is set and if the game ball passes through the specific opening 400 Z seconds before the time-out (step S1356; Yes), (T + Z + 2) seconds are set in the timer for opening the big prize opening. In other words, regardless of whether the timing of passing through the specific opening 400 is different or not, the timer before opening the big prize opening is set so that the execution end timing of the hit notification effect is the same. doing. The same applies when the small hit type is the fourth small hit type.

  In addition, when the small hit type is the fourth small hit type, in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34D) corresponding to the fourth small hit, the execution time of the hit notification effect according to the value of the specific mouth passage timer. Set the time after adding the closing time (2 seconds) of round 1 (first time). Therefore, for example, if the initial time is T seconds and the value of the specific mouth passage timer is Z seconds, (T + Z + 2) seconds are set in the pre-winner opening timer.

  Subsequent to step S 1362, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S 310) (step S 1363). In addition, according to the special symbol stop process (S304) and the small hit start pre-processing (S309), if the small hit is reached (step S145; Yes), the small hit is started via the small hit start pre-process (S309). The process proceeds to the pre-hit opening process (step S310) (see step S1363). In this case, an explanation screen end designation command, a small hit start designation command, a big prize opening closing time designation command (after the big prize opening is opened) (Designation command) is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (see step S1352, step S1358 and step S1361). If the game ball passes through the specific port 400 before the specific port passage timer times out, an operation gate pass designation command is also transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (see step S1357).

  FIG. 35, FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are flowcharts showing the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S306) executed before each round in the big hit game. In FIG. 35, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot type is the first jackpot (step S1400a). Whether the jackpot type is the first jackpot to the fifth jackpot is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). When the big hit type is the first big hit (step S1400a: Yes), the pre-opening process for the 15R probability changing big winning opening (step S1400b) shown in FIG. 36 is executed. When the big hit type is not the first big hit (step S1400a: No), the 2R probability changing big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S1400c) shown in FIG. 37 is executed.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the 15R probability variation big winning opening (step S1400b). In FIG. 36, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the timer before opening the special winning opening by 1 (step S1401). Next, when the timer before opening the big prize opening has not timed out (when the value of the timer before opening the big prize opening is not 0) (step S1402; No), the following processing (steps S1403 to S1407) is performed. ) And exit without doing.

  On the other hand, when the timer before the big prize opening is timed out (when the value of the timer before the big prize opening is 0) (step S1402; Yes), the CPU 56 designates the big prize opening time. Control to transmit the command to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed (step S1403). Specifically, the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the jackpot type (specifically, the first jackpot), and the winning opening opening time designation command corresponding to the value of the round number counter are sent to the effect control micro Control to transmit to the computer 200 is performed.

  More specifically, in the first round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”), the open / close time table corresponding to the first big hit (see FIG. 33) and the value “1” of the round number counter Based on this, a special winning opening opening time designation command in which “01” is set in the EXT data is transmitted, which designates that the first round is the first opening time (29.5 seconds). (See FIG. 20B). Note that the opening time of round 1 in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first jackpot shown in FIG. 33 is 29.5 seconds.

  Further, in the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”), based on the open / close time table corresponding to the first big hit (see FIG. 33) and the value “2” of the round number counter. A special winning opening opening time designation command in which “11” is set in the EXT data, which designates that the second round and the first opening time (29.5 seconds) are the opening time, is transmitted (FIG. 20). (See (B)). Note that the opening time of round 2 in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first jackpot shown in FIG. 33 is 29.5 seconds.

  In the third round (when the value of the round number counter is “3”), based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first big hit (see FIG. 33) and the value “3” of the round number counter. A special winning opening opening time designation command in which “21” is set in the EXT data, which designates that the third round and the first opening time (29.5 seconds) are the opening time, is transmitted (FIG. 20). (See (B)). Note that the opening time of round 3 in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first jackpot shown in FIG. 33 is 29.5 seconds.

  Similarly, in the fourth round, a special winning opening opening time designation command in which “31” is set in EXT data for designating that the fourth round is to be used and that the first opening time is the opening time is transmitted. In the round, a special winning opening opening time designation command in which “41” is set in the EXT data for designating that the fifth opening and the first opening time is the opening time is transmitted. , A special winning opening opening time designation command in which “51” is set in the EXT data for designating that the sixth opening time and the first opening time are set as the opening time is transmitted. And a special winning opening opening time designation command in which “61” is set in the EXT data designating that the first opening time is the opening time, and the eighth round is the eighth round. Open the first opening time A special winning opening opening time designation command in which “71” is set in the EXT data for designating that the time is between is transmitted, and the ninth round is the ninth round and the first opening time is the opening time. EXT data that designates “81” in the EXT data that designates EXT is transmitted, and in the 10th round, the 10th round is designated and the first opening time is designated as the opening time EXT A special winning opening opening time designation command in which “91” is set in the data is transmitted. In the eleventh round, “A1” is added to the EXT data for designating that the eleventh round and the first opening time are the opening time. A special winning opening opening time designation command is set, and in the 12th round, “B1” is set in the EXT data that designates the 12th round and the first opening time as the opening time. The prize opening opening time designation command is transmitted, and in the 13th round, the prize opening opening time in which “C1” is set in the EXT data for designating that it is the 13th round and that the first opening time is the opening time. A designation command is transmitted. In the 14th round, a special winning opening opening time designation command in which “D1” is set in EXT data designating that it is the 14th round and that the first opening time is the opening time is transmitted. Then, in the fifteenth round, a special winning opening opening time designation command in which “E1” is set in the EXT data that designates that it is the fifteenth round and that the first opening time is the opening time is transmitted.

  Subsequent to step S1403, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter (step S1404). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero.

  Subsequent to step S1404, the CPU 56 sets (sets) the opening time of the opening control in the special variable winning ball device 22 in the opening time timer (step S1405). The opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening 24 in the big hit game or the small hit game. Specifically, the open / close time table corresponding to the big hit type (specifically, the first big hit) or the time corresponding to the value of the round number counter is set as the open time in the open time timer.

  More specifically, in the first round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”), the opening time of round 1 in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the first big hit is 29.5. Set seconds to the open time timer. In the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”), 29.5 seconds, which is the opening time of round 2 in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the first big hit, Set to open time timer. In the third round (when the value of the round number counter is “3”), 29.5 seconds, which is the opening time of round 3 in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the first big hit, Set to open time timer. The same applies to the fourth to fifteenth rounds.

  Subsequent to step S1405, the CPU 56 drives the solenoid 106 to control the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball apparatus 22) to an open state (step S1406), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag to the special winning opening. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the intermediate process (step S307) (step S1407). It should be noted that, according to the pre-opening process for the 15R probability change large winning opening, when the process proceeds to the large winning opening opening process (step S307), the large winning opening opening designation command (special opening opening specified command) is performed. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 200 (see step S1403 and step S1407).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for 2R probability variation big winning opening (step S1400c). In FIG. 37, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the timer before opening the big prize opening by 1 (step S1411). Next, when the pre-winner opening timer has not timed out (step S1412; No), the following processing (steps S1413 to S1417) is not performed and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the timer before opening the big prize opening has timed out (when the value of the timer before opening the big prize opening is 0) (step S1412; Yes), the CPU 56 designates the opening time of the big prize opening. Control to transmit the command to the production control microcomputer 200 is performed (step S1413). Specifically, the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34) corresponding to the big hit type (specifically, any of the second big hit, the third big hit, the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit), round Control is performed to transmit a special winning opening opening time designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 according to the value of the number counter and the value of the plurality of opening counters.

  More specifically, at the first release (when the value of the multiple release counter is “1”) in the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second big hit (see FIG. 34A), the value “1” of the round number counter, and the value “1” of the multiple opening counter, the fact that it is the first round And a special winning opening opening time designation command in which “02” is set in the EXT data, which designates that the second opening time (0.1 second) is the opening time (see FIG. 20B). Note that the opening time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second jackpot shown in FIG. 34 (A) is 0.1 second.

  In the second big hit, when the second release (when the value of the multiple release counter is “2”) in the first round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”), the second round Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34A), the value “1” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple release counter, the fact that it is the first round and the second A special winning opening opening time designation command in which “02” is set in EXT data, which designates that the opening time (0.1 second) is set as the opening time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20B). Note that the opening time of round 1 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second jackpot shown in FIG. 34 (A) is 0.1 second.

  In the second round, the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is opened for the first time (when the value of the multi-release counter is “1”). Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34A), the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “1” of the multiple opening counter, the second round and the second A special winning opening opening time designation command in which “12” is set in the EXT data, which designates the opening time (0.1 seconds) as the opening time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20B). Note that the opening time of Round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second jackpot shown in FIG. 34 (A) is 0.1 second.

  When the second round of the second big hit (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is released for the second time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), the second round Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34A), the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple opening counter, the second round and the second A special winning opening opening time designation command in which “12” is set in the EXT data, which designates the opening time (0.1 seconds) as the opening time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20B). Note that the opening time of round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second big hit shown in FIG. 34 (A) is 0.1 second.

  Similarly, when the first round (and second round) of the first round from the third big hit to the fifth big hit is released, the fact that it is the first round and the second opening time (0.1 second) is the opening time. A special prize opening opening time designation command in which “02” is set in the EXT data is transmitted, and when the first round (and the second round) of the second round is released, the second round and the second opening time are indicated. A special winning opening opening time designation command in which “12” is set in the EXT data is transmitted to designate that (0.1 second) is the opening time.

  Subsequent to step S1413, when the value of the multiple release counter is 2 (step S1414a; Yes), the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter (step S1414b). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0 when the second opening is completed in each round, and the value of the winning number counter is maintained when the second opening is not completed in each round.

  Subsequent to step S1414a (No) or step S1414b, the CPU 56 sets (sets) the opening time of the opening control in the special variable winning ball device 22 in the opening time timer (step S1415). Specifically, the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34) corresponding to the big hit type (specifically, any of the second big hit, the third big hit, the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit), round A time corresponding to the value of the number counter or the value of the multiple release counter is set as the release time in the release time timer.

  More specifically, at the first release (when the value of the multiple release counter is “1”) in the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) Then, 0.1 second, which is the opening time of round 1 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34A) corresponding to the second big hit, is set in the opening time timer. In the second big hit, when the second release (when the value of the multiple release counter is “2”) in the first round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”), the second round In the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34A), the opening time of round 1 (second time) 0.1 second is set in the opening time timer. In the second round, the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is opened for the first time (when the value of the multi-release counter is “1”). The opening time timer is set to 0.1 second, which is the opening time of round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34A) corresponding to the big hit. When the second round of the second big hit (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is released for the second time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), the second round The opening time timer is set to 0.1 second, which is the opening time of round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34A) corresponding to the big hit.

  In the third big hit, the first round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) at the first release (when the value of the multiple release counter is “1”), the third round In the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34B), the opening time of round 1 (first time) 0.1 seconds is set in the opening time timer. In the third big hit, the third round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) is opened for the second time (when the value of the multi-release counter is “2”). In the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34B), the opening time of round 1 (second time) 0.1 second is set in the opening time timer. In the third big hit, the third round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is opened for the first time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “1”), the third round The opening time timer is set to 0.1 second, which is the opening time of round 2 (first time) in the open / close time table (see FIG. 34B) corresponding to the big hit. When the second round of the third big hit (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is opened for the second time (when the value of the counter for multiple opening is “2”), the third round The opening time timer is set to 0.1 second, which is the opening time of round 2 (second time) in the open / close time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34B). The same applies to the fourth jackpot and the fifth jackpot.

  Subsequent to step S1415, the CPU 56 drives the solenoid 106 to control the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball apparatus 22) to the open state (step S1416), and sets the special symbol process flag value to the special winning opening. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the intermediate process (step S307) (step S1417). It should be noted that according to the 2R probability variation pre-opening opening process, when the process proceeds to the pre-opening process (step S307), the pre-opening time specifying command (specifying command during opening of the pre-opening opening) is performed. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 200 (see step S1413 and step S1417).

  38, 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (step S307). In FIG. 38, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot type is the first jackpot (step S1450a). Whether the jackpot type is the first jackpot to the fifth jackpot is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). When the big hit type is the first big hit (step S1450a: Yes), the 15R probability changing big winning opening opening process (step S1450b) shown in FIG. 39 is executed. When the big hit type is not the first big hit (step S1450a: No), the 2R probability variation big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S1450c) shown in FIG. 40 is executed.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the 15R probability variation large winning opening opening process (step S1450b). In FIG. 39, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count switch 25a is turned on (whether or not a detection signal is input from the count switch 25a) (step S1451). When the count switch 25a is turned on (step S1451; Yes), that is, when a game ball won in the big winning opening 24 is detected, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S1452).

  Following step S1451 (No) or step S1452, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step S1453). When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step S1453; Yes), the process proceeds to step S1456. That is, the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) to be closed (step S1456).

  When the value of the winning number counter is not 10 (step S1453; No), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the opening time timer (step S1454). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the open time timer has timed out (whether or not the open time timer value is 0) (step S1455). When the open time timer has not timed out (step S1455; No), the following processing (steps S1456 to S1463) is not performed and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the opening time timer has timed out (step S1455; Yes), the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) to be closed (step S1456).

  Subsequent to step S1456, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 15 (step S1458). When the value of the round number counter is 15 (step S1458; Yes), that is, when the current round is the final round (15th round) of the 15R probability variation big hit (first big hit), the CPU 56 Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S308) (step S1463).

  Instead of checking whether the value of the round number counter is 15, it may be checked whether the value of the round number counter is 15 or more. According to this, even when the content of the round number counter becomes abnormal due to noise or the like, the big hit can be suitably terminated. For example, when the round number counter becomes 20 due to noise, 236 rounds are executed until the round number counter overflows (a state where 255 → 0 when it is a 1-byte counter), and then the total number of times until 15 rounds are reached. 251 rounds will be executed. However, if the value of the round number counter is 15 or more, the big hit can be ended even when the round number counter becomes 20 due to noise.

  When the value of the round number counter is not 15 (step S1458; No), that is, when there are still remaining rounds, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the round number counter (step S1459). Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a special winning opening closing time designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1460). Specifically, the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the big hit type (specifically, the first big hit) and the big winning opening closing time designation command corresponding to the value of the round number counter are sent to the effect control micro. Control to transmit to the computer 200 is performed.

  More specifically, in the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”), the open / close time table corresponding to the first big hit (see FIG. 33), the value of the round number counter “2”, On the basis of this, a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “11” is set in the EXT data for designating that the second round and the first closing time (3 seconds) are set as the closing time is transmitted (FIG. 5). 20 (A)). Note that the closing time of round 2 in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first jackpot shown in FIG. 33 is 3 seconds. Note that at the time of the processing of this processing (step S1460), since step S1459 is being performed, there is no case where the value of the round number counter is “1”.

  In the third round (when the value of the round number counter is “3”), based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first big hit (see FIG. 33) and the value “3” of the round number counter. A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “21” is set in the EXT data for designating that the third round is the closing time and the first closing time (3 seconds) is used (FIG. 20A). )reference). Note that the closing time of round 3 in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the first jackpot shown in FIG. 33 is 3 seconds.

  Similarly, in the fourth round, a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “31” is set in the EXT data is transmitted, and in the fifth round, a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “41” is set in the EXT data. The 6th round is a special winning opening closing time designation command with “51” set in EXT data, and the seventh round is a special winning opening closing time designation command with “61” set in EXT data. And, in the 8th round, a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “71” is set in the EXT data is transmitted, and in the ninth round, a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “81” is set in the EXT data. Sends a winning prize closing time designation command in which EXT data is set to “91” in the 10th round, and in the 11th round, it is set to “A1” in the EXT data. A mouth closing time designation command is sent, and a 12th round is a big winning mouth closing time designation command with “B1” set in EXT data, and a 13th round is a big prize with “C1” set in EXT data. A mouth closing time designation command is transmitted, a large winning mouth closing time designation command with “D1” set in the EXT data is transmitted in the 14th round, and a grand prize in which “E1” is set in the EXT data in the 15th round. Send mouth closing time designation command.

  Subsequent to step S1460, the CPU 56 sets (sets) the closing time of the opening control in the special variable winning ball device 22 in the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S1461). Specifically, the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit type (specifically, the first big hit) or the time corresponding to the value of the round number counter is set as the closing time in the timer before opening the big prize opening.

  More specifically, in the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”), 3 seconds which is the closing time of round 2 in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the first big hit is set. Set the timer before opening the grand prize opening. Also, in the third round (when the value of the round number counter is “3”), 3 seconds, which is the closing time of round 3 in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 33) corresponding to the first big hit, Set the timer before opening the mouth. The same applies to the fourth to fifteenth rounds.

  Subsequent to step S 1461, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening release pre-processing (step S 306) (step S 1462). It should be noted that according to the 15R probability changing large winning opening opening process, when shifting to the large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S306), the large winning opening closing time designation command (designated after opening the large winning opening) It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 200 (see step S1460 and step S1462).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the 2R probability variation large winning opening opening process (step S1450c). In FIG. 40, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the count switch 25a is turned on (whether or not a detection signal is input from the count switch 25a) (step S2451). When the count switch 25a is on (step S2451; Yes), that is, when a game ball won in the big winning opening 24 is detected, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S2452).

  Following step S2451 (No) or step S2452, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step S2453). When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step S2453; Yes), 2 is set to the value of the multiple opening counter (step S2454b), and the process proceeds to step S2456. That is, the CPU 56 sets the value of the multiple opening counter to 2 (step S2454b), and controls the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) to be closed (step S2456).

  Instead of checking whether the value of the winning number counter is 10, it may be checked whether the value of the winning number counter is 10 or more. In this embodiment, the value of the winning number counter is not cleared after the first releasing state in each round (round 1 and round 2), and the value of the first winning number counter is not cleared in the second opening state. (See steps S1414a and S1414b), it is assumed that the winning counter is 11 or more in the second open state. In such a case, until a timeout is established (step S2455 ( Yes)), it is not possible to proceed to step S2456. However, in this embodiment, the opening time for the second to fifth jackpots is very short (0.1 second; see FIG. 34), and the prizes are won all at once in the second time, so it is not more than 10 or more. As in the case of the first big hit (see step S1453), 10 is set.

  When the value of the winning number counter is not 10 (step S2453; No), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the opening time timer (step S2454a). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the open time timer has timed out (whether or not the open time timer value is 0) (step S2455). When the open time timer has not timed out (step S2455; No), the following processing (steps S2456 to S2463) is not performed and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the opening time timer has timed out (step S2455; Yes), the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball apparatus 22) to be closed (step S2456).

  Subsequent to step S2456, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter is 2 and the value of the multiple release counter is 2 (step S2458a). When the value of the round number counter is 2 and the value of the multiple release counter is 2 (step S2458a; Yes), that is, the current release is 2R probability variation big hit (second big hit to fifth big hit) In the case of the second release of the final round (second round), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S308) (step S2463).

  If the value of the round number counter is other than 2 or the value of the multiple release counter is other than 2 (step S2458a; No), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the multiple release counter is 2. (Step S2458b). When the value of the multiple opening counter is 2 (step S2458b; Yes), the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the round number counter (step S2459a), and sets 1 to the value of the multiple opening counter (step S2458a). S2459b). When the value of the multiple opening counter is not 2 (step S2458b; No), the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the multiple opening counter (step S2459c).

  Subsequent to step S2459b or step S2459c, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a special winning opening closing time designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S2460). Specifically, the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34) corresponding to the big hit type (specifically, any of the second big hit, the third big hit, the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit), round Control is performed to transmit a special winning opening closing time designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 according to the value of the number counter and the value of the plurality of opening counters.

  In more detail, at the second closing time (when the value of the counter for multiple opening is “2”) at the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second big hit (see FIG. 34A), the value “1” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple opening counter, the fact that it is the first round And a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “03” is set in the EXT data to designate that the third closing time (7 seconds) is the closing time (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 1 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second jackpot shown in FIG. 34 (A) is 7 seconds. Note that, at the time of the processing of this processing (step S2460), since steps S2459a to S2459c are performed, the value of the round number counter is “1” and the value of the multiple release counter is “1”. If not.

  In the second round, the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the first time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “1”), the second round Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34A), the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “1” of the multiple opening counter, the fact that it is the second round and the third A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “13” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (7 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20A). In addition, the closing time of round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second big hit shown in FIG. 34 (A) is 7 seconds.

  Further, when the second round of the second big hit (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the second time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), the second round Based on the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34A) corresponding to the big hit, the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple opening counter, the fact that it is the second round and the third A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “13” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (7 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of Round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the second jackpot shown in FIG. 34 (A) is 7 seconds.

  Further, at the time of the second closing (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”) in the first round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) in the third big hit, the third round Based on the open / close time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34B), the value “1” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple opening counter, the fact that it is the first round and the second A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “02” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (2 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 1 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the third big hit shown in FIG. 34B is 2 seconds.

  Further, at the time of the first closing (when the value of the counter for multiple opening is “1”) in the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) in the third big hit, Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34 (B)), the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “1” of the multiple opening counter, the fact that it is the second round and the third A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “13” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (7 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the third big hit shown in FIG. 34B is 7 seconds.

  Further, when the second round of the third big hit (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the second time (when the value of the counter for multiple opening is “2”), the third round Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34B), the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple opening counter, the second round and the second A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “12” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (2 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20A). In addition, the closing time of round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the third big hit shown in FIG. 34 (B) is 2 seconds.

  Further, when the second closing (when the value of the counter for multiple opening is “2”) in the first round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) in the fourth big hit, Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34C), the value “1” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple opening counter, the fact that it is the first round and the third A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “03” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (7 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20 (A)). The closing time of round 1 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fourth big hit shown in C) is 7 seconds.

  In the fourth round, when the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the first time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “1”), the fourth round Based on the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34C) corresponding to the big hit, the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “1” of the multiple opening counter, the second round and the second A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “12” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (2 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20 (A)). The closing time of Round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fourth big hit shown in C) is 2 seconds.

  Further, when the second closing (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) in the fourth big hit (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), the fourth round Based on the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34C), the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple release counter, the fact that it is the second round and the third A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “13” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (7 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20A). In addition, the closing time of round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fourth big hit shown in FIG. 34C is 7 seconds.

  Further, at the time of the second closing of the fifth round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), Based on the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34D) corresponding to the big hit, the value “1” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple opening counter, the fact that it is the first round and the second A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “02” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (2 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20A). In addition, the closing time of round 1 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fifth big hit shown in FIG. 34 (D) is 2 seconds.

  In the fifth round, when the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the first time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “1”), the fifth round Based on the open / close time table corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 34D), the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “1” of the multiple opening counter, the second round and the second A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “12” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (2 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fifth big hit shown in FIG. 34 (D) is 2 seconds.

  When the second round of the fifth big hit (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the second time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), the fifth round Based on the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34D) corresponding to the big hit, the value “2” of the round number counter, and the value “2” of the multiple release counter, the second round and the second A special winning opening closing time designation command in which “12” is set in the EXT data, which designates the closing time (2 seconds) as the closing time, is transmitted (see FIG. 20A). Note that the closing time of round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table corresponding to the fifth big hit shown in FIG. 34 (D) is 2 seconds.

  Subsequent to step S2460, the CPU 56 sets (sets) the closing time of the opening control in the special variable winning ball device 22 in the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2461). Specifically, the opening / closing time table corresponding to the big hit type (specifically, any of the second big hit, the third big hit, the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit), the value of the round number counter, Then, the time corresponding to the value of the multiple opening counter is set as the closing time in the timer before opening the big prize opening.

  In more detail, at the second closing time (when the value of the counter for multiple opening is “2”) at the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) Then, 7 seconds, which is the closing time of round 1 (second time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34A) corresponding to the second big hit, is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening. In the second round, the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the first time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “1”), the second round 7 seconds, which is the closing time of round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34A) corresponding to the big hit, is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening. Further, when the second round of the second big hit (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the second time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), the second round 7 seconds, which is the closing time of round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34A) corresponding to the big win, is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening.

  Further, at the time of the second closing (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”) in the first round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) in the third big hit, the third round 2 seconds, which is the closing time of round 1 (second time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34 (B)) corresponding to the big win, is set in the timer before opening the big winning opening. Further, at the time of the first closing (when the value of the counter for multiple opening is “1”) in the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) in the third big hit, 7 seconds, which is the closing time of round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34 (B)) corresponding to the big hit, is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening. Further, when the second round of the third big hit (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the second time (when the value of the counter for multiple opening is “2”), the third round 2 seconds, which is the closing time of round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34 (B)) corresponding to the big hit, is set in the timer before opening the big winning opening.

  Further, when the second closing (when the value of the counter for multiple opening is “2”) in the first round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) in the fourth big hit, 7 seconds, which is the closing time of round 1 (second time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34C) corresponding to the big win, is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening. In the fourth round, when the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the first time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “1”), the fourth round 2 seconds, which is the closing time of round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34C) corresponding to the big win, is set in the timer before opening the big winning opening. Further, when the second closing (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) in the fourth big hit (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), the fourth round 7 seconds, which is the closing time of round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34C) corresponding to the big win, is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening.

  Further, at the time of the second closing of the fifth round (when the value of the round number counter is “1”) (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), 2 seconds, which is the closing time of round 1 (second time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34D) corresponding to the big win, is set in the timer before opening the big prize opening. In the fifth round, when the second round (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the first time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “1”), the fifth round 2 seconds, which is the closing time of round 2 (first time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34D) corresponding to the big win, is set in the timer before opening the big winning opening. When the second round of the fifth big hit (when the value of the round number counter is “2”) is closed for the second time (when the value of the multiple opening counter is “2”), the fifth round 2 seconds, which is the closing time of round 2 (second time) in the opening / closing time table (see FIG. 34 (D)) corresponding to the big win, is set in the timer before opening the big winning opening.

  Subsequent to step S2461, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S306) (step S2462). It should be noted that according to the 2R probability changing large winning opening opening process, when shifting to the large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S306), the large winning opening closing time designation command (designated command after opening the large winning opening) It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 200 (see step S2460 and step S2462).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). When the big hit end display timer is set (step S160; Yes), the process proceeds to step S164.

  When the big hit end display timer is not set (step S160; No), the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and a control for transmitting a big hit end designation command according to the big hit type is performed (step S162). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is the first jackpot, a jackpot end 1 designation command is transmitted. Also, when the type of jackpot is any of the second jackpot to the fifth jackpot, a jackpot end 2 designation command is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is the first jackpot to the fifth jackpot is determined based on the data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed in the effect display device 11 (for example, the time during which the ending effect is performed) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S163). The process is terminated.

  In step S164, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0 (step S165). If the jackpot end display time has not elapsed (step S165; No), the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165; Yes), the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S168). Further, the CPU 56 sets 80 times in the probability variation counter (step S169). Further, the CPU 56 sets 80 times in the hour / times counter (step S170). That is, the CPU 56 performs control so that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shifted to the 80 high-accuracy and high-base state. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 40. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 12a and 12b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 12a and 12b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 12a and 12b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 12a and 12b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the display result designation command transmission processing also varies. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, effect control CPU 201) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 11 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process, a process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the fourth symbol display area (not shown) of the effect display device 11 is selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a changing notice effect and a random number for determining a closing time effect is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 40. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 19 and 20) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  45 to 48 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 40 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S607). Whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step SS608). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S609). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S610; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S611). . Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S612).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S613; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 10 designation command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S614).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S615; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 sets a confirmation command reception flag (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is an explanation screen end designation command (step S617; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 sets an explanation screen end designation command reception flag (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is an operation gate passage designation command (step S619; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 sets an operation gate passage designation command reception flag (step S620).

  In FIG. 46, if the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command or the like (a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start 2 designation command, a jackpot start designation command) (step S621; Yes), the presentation control CPU 201 A jackpot start designation command reception flag corresponding to the received command is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 is also referred to as a fanfare flag.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the received jackpot start designation command matches the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S623).

  Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 201 is the first if the received command is the jackpot start 1 designation command and the command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 2 designation command. It is a command that designates one big hit and is determined to be consistent. Also, for example, the effect control CPU 201 matches if the received command is the big hit start 2 designation command and the command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command (the second big hit). It is determined that there is no inconsistency in the specified command. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 201 matches if the received command is the small hit start designation command and the command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 9 designation command (third small hit It is determined that there is no inconsistency as a command for specifying. On the other hand, for example, if the received command is a jackpot start 1 designation command and the command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a command other than the display result 2 designation command, the effect control CPU 201 determines that the command is Judged as inconsistent.

  If the CPU 201 for effect control determines that the received jackpot start designation command and the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area do not match (step S623; No), the command is invalid. An inconsistency flag indicating matching is set (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625; Yes), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627; Yes), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 11 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Display control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command or the like (a jackpot end 1 designation command, a jackpot end 2 designation command, a small hit end designation command) (step S665; Yes), the presentation control CPU 201 determines that the received command The corresponding jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step S666).

  In FIG. 47, if the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S667; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 stores the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area. The value is incremented by 1 (step S668). Further, the effect control CPU 201 updates the display of the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 19a in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S669).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S670; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area. (Step S671). Further, the effect control CPU 201 updates the display of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory display unit 19b in accordance with the updated second reserved memory number (step S672).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S673; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area. (Step S674). Further, the effect control CPU 201 updates the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 19a in accordance with the updated first reserved memory number (step S675).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S676; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area. (Step S677). Further, the effect control CPU 201 updates the display of the second reserved memory number on the second reserved memory display unit 19b in accordance with the updated second reserved memory number (step S678).

  If the received effect control command is an effect gate passage designation command (step S679; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 sets an effect gate passage designation command reception flag (step S680).

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S681; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 11 (step S682). ). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started. Further, the effect control CPU 201 clears the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area and the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area (step S683). That is, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received and the customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are 0, and the variable display is not executed. Reset the number of pending storage to be stored. Even when the processing of step S683 is executed and the production control microcomputer 200 is in a state in which the addition or subtraction omission of the reserved memory number occurs and the erroneous reserved memory number is recognized, the reserved memory is stored. Can be reset to return to the normal state.

  In FIG. 48, if the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S684; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 11 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, , A blue display color background screen) (step S685). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 201 resets a probability change state flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state and a time reduction state flag indicating that the game state is a time reduction state (step S686).

  Further, if the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S687; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 11 as a background screen (for example, red). (Background screen of the display color) (step S688). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 sets the time reduction state flag (step S689) and sets the probability variation state flag (step S690).

  If the received effect control command is a special prize opening opening time designation command (special prize opening open designation command) (step S691; Yes), the production control CPU 201 stores the received special prize opening opening time designation command in the RAM. Is stored in the special winning opening opening time designation command storage area formed in step S692. Then, the effect control CPU 201 sets a special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open time designation command has been received (step S693).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening closing time designation command (special command after opening the special winning opening) (step S694; Yes), the production control CPU 201 stores the received special winning opening closing time designation command in the RAM. Is stored in the special winning opening closing time designation command storage area formed in step S695. Then, the effect control CPU 201 sets a flag after opening the special winning opening indicating that the special winning opening closing time designation command has been received (step S696).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 201 sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step S697). Then, the process proceeds to step S607.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. As described above, in this embodiment, the opening pattern in the small hit gaming state of each small hit (first small hit to fourth small hit) is 2R probability variation (second big hit to fifth big hit). Since it is the same as the opening pattern, the description of the small hit is omitted in the flowchart of the effect control process in the main process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 11 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): In the case of big hit (first big hit to fifth big hit), the explanation screen is displayed until the explanation screen end designation command specifying the end of the explanation screen is received after the end of the variation time. Is displayed (the contents of the game are explained). Then, after the display of the explanation screen is ended, a hit notification effect is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific port 400. In the hit notification effect, the hit type (specifically, 15R probability change when the first big hit, 2R probability change when the second big hit to the fifth big hit) is notified. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805). In the case of a small hit (first small hit to fourth small hit), the game contents are explained until the explanation screen end designation command specifying the end of the explanation screen is received after the end of the variation time (the explanation screen) Display). Then, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific port 400 after the end of the display of the explanation screen (or based on the fact that the predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400 after the end of the display of the explanation screen. ), A hit notification effect is executed. In the hit notification effect, the hit type (specifically, small hit) is notified. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Control is performed during the round (when the big prize opening 24 is in an open state). For example, a predetermined display effect such as the number of rounds is executed until a special prize opening closing time designation command (designation command after opening the special prize opening) in which the closing time of the special prize opening 24 is designated is received. Further, after receiving the special winning opening closing time designation command, the closing time effect (described later) executed in the round post-processing is set. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Control is performed between rounds (when the big prize opening 24 is closed). For example, until a jackpot end designation command or a big prize opening time designation command (designation command during big prize opening opening) that designates the opening time of the big prize opening 24 or the like is received, a closing time effect (described later) A number effect (described later) is executed. In addition, after receiving the special winning opening opening time designation command, a predetermined display effect to be executed in the round process is set. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805). When the big hit end designation command is received, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end production process (step S807).

  Big hit end effect process (step S807): In the effect display device 11, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. For example, when an ending designation command for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811; No), the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801). In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 201 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, by the execution of the processing of step S8002 by the effect control CPU 201, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. Display result determining means for determining the symbol is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 201 does not reach the chance symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream. The combination of the big hit symbol of the thing and the symbol in which one symbol is shifted is also determined. The effect control CPU 201 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 11. In the example shown in FIG. 52, when the received display result designation command indicates the first jackpot (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 201 displays the stop symbol. As a result, a combination of performance symbols in which the three symbols are aligned with the same symbol is determined. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates the second big hit to the fifth big hit or the first small hit to the fourth small hit (the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command to In the case of a display result 10 designation command), the effect control CPU 201 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. When the received display result designation command is out of order (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols (reach symbols) in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The effect control CPU 201 specifies “big hit”, “out”, or “small hit” based on the variation pattern command instead of the display result designation command, and displays the stop symbol of the effect symbol. It may be determined.

  The effect control CPU 201 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated to stop the effect symbol. Determine the design. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect in the effect display device 11 during the effect symbol variation display, and executes a notice effect setting process for setting the effect aspect of the notice effect (step S8003). ).

  In this embodiment, in step S8003, the effect control CPU 201 gives a notice of the advantage when controlled to the big hit gaming state (in this example, which is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on which big hit type). The presence / absence of the notice effect during change and the effect mode are determined.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the determination ratio of the changing notice effect during the change based on the changing notice effect determination table for determining the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the effect mode. As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, as the changing notice effect, the changing notice effect A (for example, an effect in which the character A appears during the change display of the effect symbol) and the changing notice effect B are shown. (For example, an effect of a mode in which the character B appears during the variation display of the effect symbol) and a notice notification C during the variation (for example, an effect of an aspect in which the character C appears during the variation display of the effect symbol) can be executed. is there. It should be noted that the mode of the changing notice effect is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment, and for example, an effect that the background screen is switched to a predetermined landscape is executed, or a predetermined story is developed. It is possible to execute various types of effects such as executing effects. Note that the during-change notice effect determination table only needs to be stored in a ROM or the like in the effect control board 80.

  Note that the random number to be compared with the determination value indicating the number of assignments in FIG. 53 is a random number for determining the changing notice effect (can take 100 numerical values from 0 to 99). According to the example shown in FIG. 53, for the first big hit, there are 10 determination values compared with the random number for determining the changing announcement effect, and 20 determination values for changing announcement effect A and 20 for changing announcement effect A. , 20 are assigned to the changing notice effect B and 50 are assigned to the changing notice effect C, respectively. That is, when the first big hit is reached, 10% of the changing notice effect is 10% (10 out of 100), 20% of the changing notice effect A is 20% (20 of 100), and 20% of the changing notice effect B is 20%. (20 out of 100) indicates that the changing notice effect C is determined at a rate of 50% (50 out of 100). Similarly, when the second big hit is reached, 20% (20/100) of the changing announcement effect is 20%, 20% of the changing announcement effect A (20/100), and 20 of the changing announcement effect B is 20 % (20 out of 100), the changing notice effect C is determined at a rate of 40% (40 out of 100). Further, the determination ratio when the third big hit, the fourth big hit, the fifth big hit, the small hit (the first small hit to the fourth small hit), or the deviation is as shown in FIG.

  Therefore, according to the example shown in FIG. 53, for example, when any of the changing notice effect A, the changing notice effect B, and the changing notice effect C is executed, the changing notice effect A and the changing notice Compared to the case where neither the effect B nor the changing notice effect C is executed, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit (any one of the first big hit to the fifth big hit) is higher. As described above, when none of the changing notice effect A, changing notice effect B, and changing notice effect C is executed, changing notice effect A, changing notice effect B, changing notice effect C Compared to the case where either of the above is executed, the expectation of a big hit is not high, but the fifth big hit can be expected a little. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 53, when the changing notice effect C is executed, the first big hit or the second big hit is compared with the case where the changing notice effect A and the changing notice effect B are executed. Expectation that becomes either of is high.

  In step S8003, specifically, the effect control CPU 201 identifies the display result based on the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. Then, the effect control CPU 201 performs a lottery process using a random number for determining the presence / absence of the changing notice effect and the effect mode using the specified display result and the changing notice effect determination table shown in FIG. Thus, the presence / absence of the notice effect during change and the effect mode (no change notice effect during change, notice effect A during change, notice effect B during change, and notice effect C during change) are determined.

  Further, the notice effect that is executed during the change display of the effect symbol is not limited to the notice effect during change shown in this embodiment, and various notice effects can be executed. For example, in step S8003, the effect control CPU 201 may determine whether or not there is a step-up notice effect, a motif display notice effect, a group notice effect, a button notice effect, a mini character notice effect, and the like.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect when the change pattern or notice effect is executed (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 201 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 11 according to the process data set in the process table (step S8006). The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 11 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 11 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 201 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. Further, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 29 is controlled.

  The process table shown in FIG. 54 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern and notice effect. If it is determined in step S8003 to execute the notice effect, the data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not decided to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  Also, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command (the special diagram variation time shown in FIG. 12) in the variation time timer (step S8007).

  Then, the effect control CPU 201 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the processing during the effect symbol variation (step S802). In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102).

  In addition, when the process timer times out (step S8103), the effect control CPU 201 switches the process data. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect part) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105). If it is decided to execute the changing notice effect in the notice effect setting process in step S8003, the process of step S8105 is executed to execute the change display of the effect symbol and the changing notice. Production is performed.

  Then, if the change time timer has timed out (step S8106), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8107).

  56, 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803). In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S861). If the stop symbol display flag is set (step S861; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 proceeds to the fanfare pre-processing (FIGS. 57 and 58) of step S870. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set (see step S866). Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the hit notification effect is executed (see step S1811 in FIG. 58). Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S861 is a stage where the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed but the hit notification effect is not yet executed. The process moves to the fanfare pre-processing (FIGS. 57 and 58) in step S870 without repeatedly executing the process of displaying the symbols.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set (step S861; No), the effect control CPU 201 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (out-of-line symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) (step S861; No). S862). The effect control CPU 201 may perform control to stop and display the effect symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, when neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed at step S862 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed at step S863 (No)), the effect control CPU 201 resets a predetermined flag ( Step S864). For example, the effect control CPU 201 resets a command reception flag such as a display result designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 201 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 50, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S865).

  When displaying a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol in step S862 (step S863; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S866). Then, the process proceeds to fanfare pre-processing (FIGS. 57 and 58) in step S870.

  In FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the explanation screen end designation command reception flag is set (step S1801). If the explanation screen end designation command reception flag is not set (step S1801; No), control for displaying the explanation screen (control for explaining the game content) is performed (step S1802). For example, image data (such as process data including explanation screen data) describing the game content is stored in a CGROM (not shown), and the effect control CPU 201 is stored in the VDP 209 mounted on the effect control board 80. On the other hand, a command for reading out image data describing the game content may be output from the CGROM. Thereby, an explanation screen is displayed on the effect display device 11.

  On the other hand, if the explanation screen end designation command reception flag is set (step S1801; No), the effect control CPU 201 resets the explanation screen end designation command reception flag (step S1803). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 201 checks whether or not the operation gate passage designation command reception flag is set (step S1804). If the operation gate passage designation command reception flag is set (step S1804; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 resets the operation gate passage designation command reception flag (step S1805). As a result, even if the game ball passes through the specific opening 400 at a time point before the explanation screen end designation command reception flag is set, for example, when the explanation screen is displayed, the passage at the previous time point is ignored. can do.

  Subsequent to step S1805, the effect control CPU 201 displays a right-handed instruction (instruction for passing the game ball through the specific port 400) (step S1807). For example, image data (such as process data including the image data) for instructing right-handing is stored in a CGROM (not shown), and the effect control CPU 201 applies to the VDP 209 mounted on the effect control board 80. A command for reading out image data instructing right-handed from the CGROM may be output. Thereby, a right-handed instruction is displayed on the effect display device 11.

  Subsequent to step S1807, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the operation gate passage designation command reception flag is set (step S1808). If the operation gate passage designation command reception flag is set (step S1808; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 resets the operation gate passage designation command reception flag (step S1809), and proceeds to step S1811 in FIG. To do. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 200 sets the operation gate passage designation command reception flag when receiving the operation gate passage designation command (see step S620). When the production control microcomputer 200 receives the operation gate passage designation command, the big hit start 1 designation command, the big hit start 2 designation command, the small hit start designation command, and the big winning opening closing time designation command (large (Designation command after opening the winning opening) is also received (see step S1307, step S1308, step S1311, step S1357, step S1358, step S1361). When receiving the special winning opening closing time designation command (specifying command after opening the special winning opening), the production control microcomputer 200 stores the special winning opening closing time designation command storage area (see step S695). Then, a flag after opening the big prize opening is set (see step S696).

  On the other hand, if the operation gate passage designation command reception flag is not set (step S1808; No), it is confirmed whether or not the big hit start designation command reception flag (fanfare flag) is set (step S1810). In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 200 receives a jackpot start designation command reception flag (fanfare) when any of the jackpot start 1 designation command, jackpot start 2 designation command, or jackpot start designation command is received. Flag) is set (see step S622). In addition, when receiving the big hit start 1 designation command, the big hit start 2 designation command, or the small hit start designation command, the production control microcomputer 200 receives the big prize opening closing time designation command (designated command after opening the big prize opening). ) Is also received (see Step S1308, Step S1311, Step S1358, Step S1361). When receiving the special winning opening closing time designation command (specifying command after opening the special winning opening), the production control microcomputer 200 stores the special winning opening closing time designation command storage area (see step S695). Then, a flag after opening the big prize opening is set (see step S696).

  In other words, when the operation gate passage designation command reception flag or the big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the big prize opening closing time designation command (designated command after opening the big prize opening) is stored as the big prize opening closing time designation command. It is stored in the area, and the flag after opening the big prize opening is set.

  If the big hit start designation command reception flag (fanfare flag) is not set (step S1808; No), the process returns to step S1807. On the other hand, if the big hit start designation command reception flag (fanfare flag) is set (step S1801; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 proceeds to step S1811 in FIG.

  58, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S1811). Subsequent to step S1811, the effect control CPU 201 determines a closing time effect according to the length of the closing time (step S1812). The closing time effect is an effect performed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is in the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of closing time effects having different effect modes (effect types) are prepared.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the determination ratio of the closing time effect based on the closing time effect determination table for determining the closing time effect. The closing time effect determination table may be stored in the ROM or the like in the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 59, in this embodiment, as the closing time effect, as the closing time effect A (the effect of counting down the remaining time until the open state is reached (there is no addition of the time to be counted down (effect))), Closing time effect B (effect in which the aura of the character (person) increases as the closing time elapses until the open state is reached) and closing time effect C (character depending on the elapse of the closing time until the open state is reached) (Drafting effect) and closing time effect D (an effect in which the balloon expands according to the remaining time until the opening state is reached. The closing time effect E (the effect of counting down the remaining time until the open state is reached (the addition of the time to be counted down (there is an effect))) can be executed.

  The closing time effects B and C are not changed according to the elapsed time, but may be changed according to the number of game balls riding on the movable member (bottom surface member 23). Specifically, in the closing time effect B, the aura may increase depending on the number of game balls riding on the movable member, and in the closing time effect C, the bugs increase depending on the number of game balls riding on the movable member. Also good. In this embodiment, the closing time effects A, D, and E indicate to the player when to be in an open state, so that a large number of game balls can be placed on the variable winning device 22 in the closed state before the open state is reached. You can make me think. In addition, the closing time effects B and C may indicate to the player the time during which the player is controlled to be in the closed state, and he / she wants the player not to be in an open state until he / she rides many variable winning devices 22 in the closed state. Yes, you can enhance the fun of the game. In this actual form, it is set as the aspect which selects and performs any one of closing time effect A-closing time effect E, but even if it is the aspect which performs only one, the same effect is fully exhibited. it can.

  The extra effect in the closing time effect E is an effect in which a numerical value (such as remaining time) that is normally counted down with the passage of time is increased at a certain timing. For example, the remaining time is increased by 2 seconds at the timing of “5 seconds” → “4 seconds” → “3 seconds”, and “5 seconds” is displayed. The display mode is the same as that of the closing time effect A, except for the addition effect of the closing time effect E.

  59 is a random number for determining the closing time effect (100 numerical values from 0 to 99 can be taken). According to the example shown in FIG. 59, for the case of closing for 2 seconds (second closing time), the closing time effect A has 40 determination values that are compared with a random number for determining the closing time effect. 30 time effects B, 10 closing time effects C, 10 closing time effects D, and 10 closing time effects E are allotted. That is, in the second closing time (when closing for 2 seconds), the closing time effect A is 40% (40 out of 100), the closing time effect B is 30% (30 out of 100), and the closing time effect is C represents 10% (30 out of 100), closing time production D is 10% (10 out of 100), and closing time production E is 10% (10 out of 100). ing. In addition, in the case of closing for 7 seconds (third closing time), the determination values compared with the random number for determining the closing time effect are 10 for the closing time effect A, 10 for the closing time effect B, 20 are assigned to the closing time effect C, 20 are assigned to the closing time effect D, and 40 are assigned to the closing time effect E, respectively. That is, in the third closing time (in the case of closing for 7 seconds), the closing time effect A is 10% (10 out of 100), the closing time effect B is 10% (10 out of 100), the closing time effect. C represents 20% (20 out of 100), closing time production D is 20% (20 out of 100), and closing time production E is 40% (40 out of 100). ing.

  In addition, in the closing time effect A executed in the second closing time (2 seconds), the initial value of the countdown is 2 seconds. In the closing time effect A executed at the third closing time (7 seconds), the initial value of the countdown is 7 seconds. In addition, since the aura gradually increases in the closing time effect B, the closing time effect B executed in the third closing time (7 seconds) is more effective than the closing time effect B executed in the second closing time (2 seconds). Also increases the aura. In addition, since the whistle gradually appears and increases in the closing time effect C, the closing time effect C executed in the second closing time (2 seconds) is executed in the closing time effect C executed in the third closing time (7 seconds). More bugs than Further, in the closing time effect D, since the balloon gradually inflates and bursts when it is opened, the closing time effect D executed in the third closing time (7 seconds) is more suitable for the second closing time (2 seconds). Is slower than the closing time effect D executed in (or originally, it is a large balloon that does not burst in the middle). Moreover, since the closing time effect E executed in the second closing time (2 seconds) has an additional effect, the initial value of the countdown is less than 2 seconds. Since the closing time effect E executed in the third closing time (7 seconds) has an additional effect, the initial value of the countdown is less than 7 seconds. In addition, the mode of the closing time effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, according to the elapsed time (the remaining time until the opening state is reached or the passage of the closing time until the opening state is reached). ), As long as the display content changes.

  In this embodiment, since the closing time effect is not executed in the big hit game state of the first jackpot, a random number for determining the closing time effect is set for the case of closing for 3 seconds (first closing time). The number of judgment values to be compared with the numerical value is not shown.

  In the process of step S1812, the effect control CPU 201 first reads a prize winning opening closing time designation command (designating command after opening the prize winning opening) from the prize winning opening closing time designation command storage area, and designates the prize winning opening closing time. The closing time is confirmed from the value of the EXT data of the command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 indicates that the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening closing time designation command is “01”, “11”, “21”, “31”, “41”,..., “D1”. When it is “E1”, it is confirmed that it is the first closing time (3 seconds). Further, the effect control CPU 201 indicates that the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening closing time designation command is “02”, “12”, “22”, “32”, “42”,..., “D2” “E2”. If it is, it is confirmed that it is the second closing time (2 seconds). However, in this embodiment, when it is the second to fourth big hits, since the third round or more is not performed, the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening closing time designation command is “32”, “42”, ..., "D2" and "E2" are not obtained (see FIGS. 20 and 34). Further, the effect control CPU 201 indicates that the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening closing time designation command is “03”, “13”, “23”, “33”, “43”,..., “D3” “E3”. When it is, it is confirmed that it is the third closing time (7 seconds). However, in this embodiment, when it is the second to fourth big hits, since the third round or more is not performed, the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening closing time designation command is “33”, “43”, ..., “D3” and “E3” are not obtained (see FIGS. 20 and 34).

  Note that the processing of step S1812 is a closing effect in the first closing in the big hit gaming state (the first round closing in the first big hit, the first round (first time) closing in the second big hit to the fifth big hit). At the timing of the processing in step S1812, the value of the EXT data of the big winning opening closing time designation command (designated after opening the big winning opening) read from the big winning opening closing time designation command storage area is “ One of “01”, “02”, and “03” (see FIG. 33, FIG. 34, and step S1311). More specifically, the value of the EXT data is “01” for the first big hit, the value of the EXT data is “03” for the second big hit, and the value of the EXT data is the third big hit. The value of EXT data is “02” when it is “03” and the fourth big hit, and the value of EXT data is “02” when it is the fifth big hit.

  When the closing time is 2 seconds (second closing time), the effect control CPU 201 that has confirmed the closing time determines that the closing time effect A is to be executed at a rate of 40%, and executes the closing time effect B. Is determined at a rate of 30%, execution of the closing time effect C is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of the closing time effect D is determined at a rate of 10%, and the closing time effect E is determined. Determine what to do at a rate of 10%. When the closing time is 7 seconds (third closing time), the effect control CPU 201 determines that the closing time effect A is to be executed at a rate of 10%, and executes the closing time effect B. Deciding at a rate of 10%, deciding to execute the closing time effect C at a rate of 20%, deciding to execute the closing time effect D at a rate of 20%, and executing the closing time effect E Is determined at a rate of 40%. When the closing time is 3 seconds (first closing time), the effect control CPU 201 determines that the closing time effect (the closing time effect A to the closing time effect E) is not executed at a rate of 100%.

  The closing time effect A when the closing time is 2 seconds (second closing time) is executed for 2 seconds, and the closing time effect A when the closing time is 7 seconds (third closing time) is executed for 7 seconds. Is done. The same applies to the closing time effect B, the closing time effect C, the closing time effect D, and the closing time effect E.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 59, for example, when the closing time effect C and the closing time effect D are executed, the closing time is 7 seconds (the third closing time compared to when the closing time effect B is executed). ) Is likely (expected). Further, when the closing time effect E is executed, there is a higher possibility (expectation) that the closing time is 7 seconds (third closing time) than when any other closing time effect is executed. Become. In other words, it is not possible to distinguish whether the closing time effect A is being executed or the closing time effect E is being executed in the display mode before the adding effect is executed, but the adding effect was executed 2 seconds before the start. At the time, the possibility (expectation) of the closing time being 7 seconds (third closing time) is increased. In addition, after the start of 2 seconds, it is found that the closing time is 7 seconds (the third closing time) regardless of whether there is an extra effect (regardless of the closing time effect A and the closing time effect E).

  Subsequent to step S1812, the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the hit notification effect and the closing effect determined in step S1812 (step S1813), and starts a process timer (step S1814). Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S1815).

  In the process of step S1814, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer so as to be executed in the order of the hit notification effect → the closing time effect as shown in FIGS.

  In the hit notification effect, the type of win is notified. For example, when the big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the big hit start 1 designation command is stored, “15R probability change” is notified, and the big hit start 2 designation command is issued. “2R probability change” is notified when the big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to is stored, and “small hit” is notified when the big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the small hit start designation command is stored. So that For example, CGROM (not shown) stores process data including “15R probability variation” image data, process data including “2R probability variation” image data, and process data including “small hit” image data. When the big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the big hit start 1 designation command is stored for the VDP 209 mounted on the production control board 80, the production control CPU 201 includes a process including image data of “15R probability change”. A command for reading data is output, and when a big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the big hit start 2 designation command is stored, a command for reading process data including image data of “2R probability change” is output, The big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the small hit start designation command is stored. May output an instruction for reading the process data including the image data of "Koatari" when being.

  In addition, when the effect gate passage designation command reception flag is set when the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804), the effect control CPU 201 passes the effect gate pass. Reset the specified command reception flag. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the effect gate 34 before transitioning to the jackpot display process (step S804) (for example, during and before execution of the effect symbol variation stop process), the game ball is reset once. Game balls that have passed through the effect gate 34 before the transition to the jackpot display process can be excluded from the specified falling ball number in the falling ball number effect process (see step S1905) in the jackpot display process. .

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804). In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 201 first receives whether or not the big prize opening open flag is set (that is, whether or not the big prize opening open time designation command (large prize opening open designation command) is received). Is confirmed (step S1901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (step S1901; No), that is, when it is not the start timing of round 1, the effect control CPU 201 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S1903). The effect control CPU 201 controls the effect devices (the effect display device 11, the speaker 29, the top frame LED 30a, the left frame LED 30b, the right frame LED 30c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S1904). Thus, before the special variable winning ball device 22 is in an open state (when the special variable winning ball device 22 is in a closed state), for example, the effect display device 11 displays a big hit symbol and wins. A notification effect or a closing time effect (the closing time effect determined in step S1812) is executed.

  Subsequent to step S1904, the effect control CPU 201 executes a falling ball number effect process (see FIG. 64) related to the falling ball number effect (described later) (step S1905). Although the details of the falling ball number effect process will be described later, by executing the falling ball number effect process, before the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened (the special variable winning ball device 22 is closed). For example, in the effect display device 11, the falling ball number effect (the specific number of the falling ball number) according to the specific number of the falling ball number (the specific number that can be changed as shown in FIG. 65). Display).

  Subsequent to step S1905 (falling ball number effect processing), the effect control CPU 201 switches process data if the process timer has timed out (step S1906; Yes) (step S1907). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1908).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set (step S1901; Yes), that is, when the start timing of round 1 is reached, the effect control CPU 201 resets the special winning opening open flag ( Step S1909).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the inconsistency flag is set (step S1910). If the inconsistency flag is set (step S1910; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the in-round effect including the special effect (step S1911). Note that the fact that the inconsistency flag was set means that the display result designation command received at the start of variation of the production symbol and the jackpot start designation command received at the start of the big hit game were inconsistent. .

  On the other hand, if the inconsistency flag is not set (step S1910; No), the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the effect during the normal round (step S1912).

  Subsequent to step S1911 or step S1912, the effect control CPU 201 starts a process timer (step S1913), and updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1914). .

  According to the fanfare pre-processing shown in FIGS. 57 and 58 and the big hit display processing shown in FIG. 60, when the big hit (first big hit to fifth big hit), the game ball has passed through the specific port 400. (Step S1808 (Yes) in FIG. 57), the process data of the winning notification effect and the closing time effect is set (Step S1813 in FIG. 58), and the winning prize opening opening time designation command is received. Until the big winning opening open flag is set (during step S1901 (No) in FIG. 60), the winning notification effect and the closing time effect are executed. In other words, the hit notification effect and the closing time effect are not executed until the game ball passes through the specific port 400. In addition, according to the big hit start pre-processing in FIG. 31, when the game ball is not passing through the specific port 400, not only the big gate start designation command but also the big hit start designation command is not transmitted. On condition that it is set (provided that it becomes step S1810 (Yes) in FIG. 57), the hit notification effect and the closing time effect are not executed. Further, according to the big hit start pre-processing in FIG. 31, the big prize opening opening pre-timer is set using the execution time of the hit notification effect which is a fixed time regardless of the passing timing of the specific opening 400. (Step S1312 in FIG. 31), regardless of the passage timing of the specific port 400, a special winning opening opening time designation command is transmitted (Step S1403 in FIG. 36, Step S1413 in FIG. 37). Therefore, the execution time (length) of the hit notification effect and the closing time effect does not depend on the passage timing of the specific port 400. In the case of a big hit (first big hit to fifth big hit), when the operation gate passage designation command is transmitted, the big hit start designation command is also transmitted. The hit notification effect and the closing time effect may be executed on condition that the jackpot start designation command is received.

  In addition, when it is a small hit (first small hit to fourth small hit), according to the small hit start preprocessing of FIG. 32, a predetermined time has passed even if the game ball does not pass through the specific port 400. In the case (when it becomes step S1354 (Yes) in FIG. 32), the small hit start designation command is transmitted, and the big hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S621 in FIG. 46). Therefore, in the case of small hit (first small hit to fourth small hit), in addition to the case where the process data of the notification effect and the closing time effect is set on condition that the game ball has passed through the specific port 400 Then, on condition that the predetermined time has elapsed (provided that it becomes step S1810 (Yes) in FIG. 57), process data of the hit notification effect and the closing time effect are set. In addition, according to the small hit start pre-processing in FIG. 32, the timing of passing through the specific port 400 is different using the execution time of the hit notification effect according to the passing timing of the specific port 400 (value of the specific port passing timer). In either case, or when it does not pass, the pre-opening timer is set so that the execution end timing of the hit notification effect is the same (step S1362 in FIG. 32). A special winning opening opening time designation command is transmitted according to the passage timing of the specific opening 400 and the like. Therefore, the execution time (length) of the hit notification effect and the closing time effect depends on the passage timing of the specific port 400 and the like. That is, the earlier the game ball passes through the specific port 400, the faster the hit notification effect is executed (the longer the end time is constant), and the game ball can be played even if the game ball does not pass through the specific port 400. Although the time is shorter than when passing through the specific opening 400, a hit notification effect is executed.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the in-round processing (step S805). In the in-round processing, the effect control CPU 201 first receives whether or not the flag after opening the big prize opening is set (that is, whether or not the special prize opening closing time designation command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) is received. Is confirmed (step S2901). When the flag after the big prize opening is not set (step S2901; No), that is, when the closing timing is not reached, the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S2902). The effect control CPU 201 controls the effect devices (the effect display device 11, the speaker 29, the top frame LED 30a, the left frame LED 30b, the right frame LED 30c, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n (step S2903). Thereby, when the special variable winning ball device 22 is in the open state, for example, the effect display device 11 displays the jackpot symbol and displays the characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like. The

  Next, if the process timer has timed out (step S2904; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 switches the process data (step S2905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S2906).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is set (step S2901; Yes), that is, if the closing timing is reached, the effect control CPU 201 resets the flag after opening the big prize opening (step S2907).

  Subsequent to step S2907, the effect control CPU 201 determines a closing time effect according to the length of the closing time (step S2908). In the process of step S2908, as in the process of step S1812, the special winning opening closing time designation command (designated command after the special winning opening is opened) is read from the special winning opening closing time designation command storage area, and the special winning opening closing time designation command is read. The closing time is confirmed from the value of the EXT data, and any one of the closing time effect A to the closing time effect E is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 59 (however, as described above, the big hit gaming state of the first big hit In step S1812, the closing time effect is not executed. Note that the process of step S2908 determines the closing effect in the second and subsequent closing of the big hit gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S2908, the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the closing effect determined in step S2908 (step S2909), starts a process timer (step S2910), and sets a falling ball timer (described later). Clear (step S2911), and update the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806) (step S2912). The effect control CPU 201 resets the effect gate passage designation command reception flag when the effect gate passage designation command reception flag is set. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the effect gate 34 before shifting to the post-round processing (step S806) (for example, during and before execution of the processing during the round), the game ball is reset once. The game balls that have passed through the effect gate 34 before the transition to the process can be excluded from the specified falling ball number in the falling ball number effect process in the post-round processing (see step S3905).

  62 and 63 are flowcharts showing the post-round processing (step S806). In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 201 first checks whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag (see step S666) is set (step S3901).

  When the big hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S3901; Yes), as shown in FIG. 63, the effect control CPU 201 resets the big hit end designation command reception flag (step S3942). Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the ending effect (step S3943). The effect control CPU 201 starts the effect period measurement timer and also starts the process timer (step S3944). The performance period measurement timer is a timer that is set based on completion of all rounds of the jackpot game. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (step S807) (step S3945).

  Returning to FIG. 62, when the big hit end designation command reception flag is not set (step S3901; No), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the big prize opening open flag is set (that is, the big prize opening). Whether or not an opening time designation command (special command for opening a special prize opening is received) is received (step S3902). When the big prize opening opening flag is not set (step S3902; No), that is, when the opening timing is not reached, the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S3903). The effect control CPU 201 controls the effect devices (the effect display device 11, the speaker 29, the top frame LED 30a, the left frame LED 30b, the right frame LED 30c, and the like) according to the contents of the process data n (step S3904). Thereby, before the special variable winning ball device 22 is in the open state (when the special variable winning ball device 22 is in the closed state), for example, in the effect display device 11, the closing time effect (determined in step S2908). Closed time production) is performed.

  Subsequent to step S3904, the effect control CPU 201 executes a falling ball number effect process (see FIG. 64) related to the falling ball number effect (step S3905).

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the falling ball number effect process. The falling ball number effect process is executed not only in the round post-process (see step S3905 in FIG. 62) but also in the big hit display process (see step S1905 in FIG. 60).

  In the falling ball number effect process shown in FIG. 64, the effect control CPU 201 first determines whether or not an effect gate passage designation command reception flag is set (that is, whether or not an effect gate passage designation command has been received). Confirmation is made (step S4001). When the effect gate passage designation command reception flag is not set (step S4001; No), that is, when the passage of the game ball of the effect gate 34 is not detected, the process proceeds to step S4004.

  When the production gate passage designation command reception flag is set (step S4001; Yes), that is, when the passage of the game ball of the production gate 34 is detected, the production control CPU 201 receives the production gate passage designation command. The flag is reset (step S4002).

  Subsequent to step S4002, the effect control CPU 201 starts a falling ball timer for the game ball (the game ball corresponding to the effect gate passage designation command reception flag) (step S4003). The falling ball timer is a timer that starts based on the fact that each game ball has passed through the effect gate 34. That is, each time a game ball passes through the effect gate 34, a falling ball timer corresponding to each game ball starts individually.

  65 and 66 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the falling ball number effect process. FIG. 65A is a falling ball timer (referred to as a falling ball timer 1) started by the effect control CPU 201 at a time T when one gaming ball (referred to as a gaming ball 1) passes through the effect gate 34. . In FIG. 65 (A), since it is the moment of starting, the elapsed time of the falling ball timer 1 (measurement time starting from the start) is “0.0 (seconds)”. FIG. 65 (B) shows a falling ball timer 0.3 seconds after time T. According to FIG. 65 (B), 0.3 seconds after time T, another game ball (referred to as game ball 2) passes through the effect gate 34, and the effect control CPU 201 uses the falling ball timer (falling ball). Timer 2) is started. FIG. 65C shows the falling ball timer 1.0 seconds after the time T. According to FIG. 65 (C), the elapsed times of the falling ball timer 1 and the falling ball timer 2 are advanced by 0.7 seconds from the time of FIG. 65 (B), respectively. FIG. 65 (D) shows a falling ball timer 2.5 seconds after time T. According to FIG. 65 (D), after 1.3 seconds from time T, another game ball (referred to as game ball 3) passes through the effect gate 34, and the effect control CPU 201 uses the falling ball timer (falling ball). The timer 3 is started, and 1.6 seconds after the time T, another game ball (referred to as the game ball 4) passes through the effect gate 34, and the effect control CPU 201 uses the falling ball timer (falling ball). The timer 4 is started), and 2.5 seconds after the time T, another game ball (referred to as the game ball 5) passes through the effect gate 34, and the effect control CPU 201 uses the falling ball timer (falling ball). Timer 5) is started. Similarly, FIG. 65 (E) shows a falling ball timer 7.0 seconds after time T, FIG. 65 (F) shows a falling ball timer 7.1 seconds after time T, and FIG. 65 (G). Represents a falling ball timer after 7.2 seconds from time T.

  In other words, each time the game ball passes through the effect gate 34 (step S4001; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 starts a new falling ball timer as shown in FIG. 65 in the process of step S4003.

  Subsequent to step S4001 (No) or step S4003, the effect control CPU 201 specifies the number of falling balls on the bottom member 23, which is a movable member, based on the timer value of the falling ball timer (step S4004). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 201 specifies the number of falling sphere timers whose timer value is within a predetermined range as the number of falling spheres on the movable member (bottom surface member 23). The predetermined range includes the time (T1) required for the game ball that has passed through the effect gate 34 to reach the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23, and the time until the game ball reaches the downstream region 23L from the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23. It is determined based on the required time (T2). In this embodiment, the required time (T1) for the game ball that has passed through the effect gate 34 to reach the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23 is 1 second, and the game ball moves from the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23 to the downstream region 23L. The required time (T2) to reach is 6 seconds. That is, the predetermined range is set to 6 seconds from the time when 1 second has elapsed to the time when 7 seconds have elapsed. That is, it is assumed that the game ball corresponding to the falling ball timer whose timer value is 1 second to 7 seconds has elapsed is on the bottom surface member 23.

  For example, when the timer value of each falling ball timer is as shown in FIG. 65B at the time of execution of step S4004, the effect control CPU 201 has a falling ball that is between 1 second and 7 seconds elapsed. The number of timers “0” is specified as the number of falling balls “0” on the movable member (bottom surface member 23). If the timer values of the respective falling ball timers are as shown in FIG. 65D when step S4004 is executed, the effect control CPU 201 causes the falling ball that is between 1 second and 7 seconds to pass. The number “3” of timers (corresponding to falling ball timer 1, falling ball timer 2, and falling ball timer 3) is specified as the number of falling balls on the movable member (bottom surface member 23). That is, a game ball 1 corresponding to the falling ball timer 1, a game ball 2 corresponding to the falling ball timer 2, and a game ball 3 corresponding to the falling ball timer 2 are present on the movable member (bottom surface member 23). As specified. Note that “count” in FIGS. 65C to 65G indicates a falling ball timer that is counted as a falling ball timer (falling ball timer 1 is applicable) from the time when 1 second has elapsed to the time when 7 seconds have elapsed. ing. If the timer values of the respective falling ball timers are as shown in FIG. 65 (E) at the time of execution of step S4004, the effect control CPU 201 causes the falling ball that is between 1 second and 7 seconds to elapse. The number “10” of timers (corresponding to falling ball timer 1 to falling ball timer 10) is specified as the number of falling balls on the movable member (bottom surface member 23). That is, each of the game ball 1 corresponding to the falling ball timer 1 to the game ball 10 corresponding to the falling ball timer 10 is specified as a game ball existing on the movable member (bottom surface member 23). If the timer value of each falling ball timer is as shown in FIG. 65F at the time of execution of step S4004, the effect control CPU 201 has a falling ball that is between 1 second and 7 seconds elapsed. The number “9” of timers (corresponding to falling ball timer 2 to falling ball timer 10) is specified as the number of falling balls on the movable member (bottom surface member 23). That is, each of the game ball 2 corresponding to the falling ball timer 2 to the game ball 10 corresponding to the falling ball timer 10 is specified as a game ball existing on the movable member (bottom surface member 23). Since the timer value of the falling ball timer 1 is 7.1 seconds, the game ball 1 corresponding to the falling ball timer 1 is not specified as a game ball existing on the movable member (bottom surface member 23) (that is, the bottom surface). It has passed through the downstream region 23L of the member 23 and has already been determined not to be present on the bottom member 23).

  Subsequent to step S4004, the effect control CPU 201 determines a falling ball number effect corresponding to the falling ball number specified in step S4004 (step S4005). The falling ball number effect is an effect performed when the special variable winning ball device 22 is in the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of falling ball number effects having different effect modes (effect colors) are prepared.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, when the number of downhill balls specified in step S4004 is “0 (number)”, the effect control CPU 201 is displayed at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 11. No band display is determined (determined not to execute the falling ball number effect). In addition, when the number of downhill balls specified in step S4004 is “1 (number)” to “3 (number of pieces)”, the effect control CPU 201 effects the blue “blue belt” as an effect display. It is decided to display on the upper part of the display screen of the apparatus 11. When the number of downhill balls specified in step S4004 is “4 (pieces)” to “6 (pieces)”, the effect control CPU 201 produces an effect display of a green “green belt” as the downflow ball number effect. It is decided to display on the upper part of the display screen of the apparatus 11. In addition, when the number of falling balls specified in step S4004 is “7 (pieces)” to “8 (pieces)”, the effect control CPU 201 produces an effect display of a red “red belt” as the falling ball number effect. It is decided to display on the upper part of the display screen of the apparatus 11. If the number of falling balls specified in step S4004 is “9 (pieces)”, the effect control CPU 201 displays a golden “gold band” as the falling ball number effect at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 11. It is determined to be displayed. Note that “9 (pieces)” is a predetermined number (for example, ten pieces, see step S1453) when the special variable winning device 22 is controlled from the open state to the closed state separately from the open time timer in a big hit game state or the like. Is one less. When the number of downhill balls specified in step S4004 is “10 (pieces)” to “12 (pieces)”, the effect control CPU 201 effects the purple “purple belt” as an effect display. It is decided to display on the upper part of the display screen of the apparatus 11. If the number of falling balls identified in step S4004 is “13 (or more)”, the effect control CPU 201 effects the cherry blossom pattern (sakura pattern) “sakura pattern belt” as an effect display. It is decided to display on the upper part of the display screen of the apparatus 11.

  In this embodiment, the falling ball number used for determining the falling ball number effect is the falling ball number specified through each round. In other words, the “number of falling balls” in FIG. 66 is the number of falling balls specified in each round. Accordingly, in the case where there is a closed state twice in one round (in the case of second big hit to fifth big hit, first small hit to fourth small hit, see FIGS. 17 and 18), the second round ) In the closed state, the number of falling balls specified at the end of the closed state of the first round (first time) (immediately before the opening state) is added to the number of falling balls specified in the first round (second time), In the closed state of the second round (second time), the falling ball specified at the end of the closed state of the second round (first time) (immediately before the open state) is added to the number of falling balls specified in the second round (second time). Numbers are added. For example, the number of falling balls specified at the end of the closed state of the first round (first time) (immediately before the first round (first time) becomes open) is “6”, and the closed state of the first round (second time) When the number of falling balls specified at a certain timing is “4”, the “specified number of falling balls” used when determining the falling ball number effect at the timing of the first round (second time) is “ It becomes "10" which added "4" to "6". Also, for example, the number of falling balls specified at the end of the second round (first round) closed state (immediately before the second round (first round) opened state) is “9”, and the second round (second round) closed When the number of falling balls specified at a certain timing of the state is “5”, the “specified falling ball number” used when determining the falling ball number effect at the timing of the second round (second time) is It becomes "14" which added "5" to "9".

  More specifically, for example, in the closed state of one round (first time), the production control CPU 201 calculates the number of falling balls (the latest number of falling balls) specified in step S4004 every time step S4004 is executed. When it is time to temporarily store it in a predetermined area of the RAM and set it to the open state (step S3909; Yes), the number of falling balls stored temporarily is the last of the closed state (1 round) Stored as the number of falling spheres specified immediately before (the first time of opening), and in the closed state of one round (second time), the falling sphere specified in step S4004 each time step S4004 is executed. The number of the falling balls specified at the end of the one-round (first) closed state stored in the number is added to the number, and in the subsequent step S4005 It may be the "specified flow down counts" in determining falling counts effect. Similarly, in the closed state of two rounds (first time), the effect control CPU 201 stores the number of downflow balls (the latest downflow ball number) specified in step S4004 every time step S4004 is executed in a predetermined area of the RAM. Is temporarily stored in the open state (step S3909; Yes), and the temporarily stored number of falling balls is the last of the two rounds (first time) of the closed state (2 rounds (first time)). Is stored as the number of falling balls specified immediately before the opening state), and in the closed state of the second round (second time), the number of falling balls specified in step S4004 is stored every time step S4004 is executed. The number of falling balls specified at the end of the closed state of the two rounds (the first time) is added, and in step S4005, the number of falling balls is produced. It may be the "specified flow down counts" when determining.

  Further, if it is assumed that a game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds, it has been explained that 10 game balls can flow down and accumulate on the bottom member 23 (can exist on the bottom member 23). In the case where there are two closed states in one round (in the case of the second big hit to the fifth big hit, the first small hit to the fourth small hit, see FIG. 17 and FIG. 18), 11 in one round There can be more than one prize. For example, 9 wins are collected (all together) in the open state (0.1 second) of the first round (first time), and are also collected in the open state (0.1 second) of the next round (second time) ( There is a chance that 10 will win further, i.e. a total of 19 wins. In addition, if the number of winning matches the specific number of falling balls in step S4004 at the timing of opening (step S3909; Yes), it is immediately before the winning of 9 in one round (first round) opening. The specific number of falling balls in the closed state of the first round (first time) is nine, and in the opened state of the first round (second time), the flow in the closed state of the first round (first time) immediately before winning 10 is won. The specific number of spheres is 19 (19 which is the sum of the first 9 and the second 10).

  Subsequent to step S4005, the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the falling ball number effect determined in step S4005 (step S4006). Thereby, before the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is in an open state (when the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is in a closed state), for example, in the effect display device 11, a specific number of falling balls (FIG. As shown in 65, a falling ball number effect (a display of a band according to a specific number of falling balls) according to a specific number that can be changed every moment) is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 62, following step S3905 (falling ball number effect processing), if the process timer has timed out (step S3906; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 switches the process data (step S3907). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S3908).

  When the big winning opening open flag is set (step S3902; Yes), that is, when the opening timing is reached, the effect control CPU 201 resets the big winning opening open flag (step S3909).

  Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the inconsistency flag is set (step S3910). If the inconsistency flag is set (step S3910; Yes), the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the in-round effect including the special effect (step S3911). Note that the fact that the inconsistency flag was set means that the display result designation command received at the start of variation of the production symbol and the jackpot start designation command received at the start of the big hit game were inconsistent. .

  On the other hand, if the inconsistency flag is not set (step S3910; No), the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the effect during the normal round (step S3912).

  Subsequent to step S3910 or step S3912, the effect control CPU 201 starts a process timer (step S3913) and updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S3914). .

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot game (step S971). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all rounds of the jackpot game are completed in the post-round processing (see step S806). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S972).

  When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S972), the production control CPU 201 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S973), and the production device (production display device 9) according to the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27 etc.) is executed (step S974). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

  Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S975), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S976). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S977).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 resets a predetermined flag (step S978). For example, the effect control CPU 201 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S979). Also, when the big hit start designation command reception flag (fanfare flag) is set when the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800), The CPU 201 resets the jackpot start designation command reception flag.

  68 to 71 are diagrams showing display operation examples in the effect display device 11. Specifically, FIGS. 68 to 71 show display operation examples of a closing time effect and a falling ball number effect executed in the big hit game state (or the small hit game state). 68 to 71 are a series of effect screens after the symbol is stopped. FIG. 68 (a) → FIG. 68 (b) → FIG. 68 (c) → FIG. 68 (d) or FIG. 69 (a) → FIG. 69 (b) → ... → 69 (e) → 69 (f) → FIG. 70 (a) → FIG. 70 (b) →… → FIG. 70 (g) → FIG. 70 (h) → FIG. 71 (a) → FIG. 71 (b) →... → FIG. 71 (d) → FIG. Note that “C-B1” described in FIG. 69B or the like is a flowing ball number effect that displays “blue band”, and “C-Gr” described in FIG. 70B or the like is “green band”. “C-Re” described in FIG. 70 (c) or the like is a flowing ball number effect displaying “red belt”, and “C-” described in FIG. 71 (c). “Cherry blossom” is an effect of the falling ball number displaying “sakura pattern belt” (see FIG. 66).

  FIG. 68 (a) is a scene in which a scene (decided effect design “1”, “3”, “5”) that is the fourth big hit or the third small hit is displayed. When the effect control CPU 201 stops and displays the effect symbol in the effect symbol variation stop process, the confirmed effect symbol is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 68A (see step S862 in FIG. 56).

  FIG. 68B shows a scene where an explanation screen is displayed. In the effect symbol fluctuation stopping process (see FIG. 56), when the fourth big hit or the third small hit is made, the fanfare pre-processing is executed (see step S870). In the fanfare pre-processing, the explanation screen is displayed until the explanation screen end designation command reception flag is set (until the explanation screen end designation command is received) as shown in FIG. (See step S1802 in FIG. 57). In other words, the explanation screen is displayed until the jackpot start pre-processing start timer set as the time for continuing to display the description of the game content times out (see step S136 in FIG. 30, step S1300 in FIG. 31, and step S1302). ). Whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific port 400 is determined after the explanation screen end designation command flag is set (that is, after the explanation screen has been displayed). While being displayed, the passage of the game medium through the specific port 400 is invalid.

  FIG. 68 (c) shows a scene in which a right-handed instruction is displayed. In the fanfare pre-processing (see FIG. 57), after the explanation screen end designation command reception flag is set (step S1801 in FIG. 57; Yes), that is, after the display of the explanation screen is finished, FIG. As shown, a right-handed instruction is displayed.

  FIG. 68D is a scene in which “2R probability change” is notified as a hit notification effect. In the case of the fourth big hit, the operation gate passage designation command reception flag is set after the right-handed instruction is displayed (step S1808 in FIG. 57; Yes), as shown in FIG. 68 (d). In the notification effect, “2R probability change” is notified (see step S1813 in FIG. 58).

  FIG. 68 (e) is a scene in which “small hit” is notified as a hit notification effect. In the case of the third small hit, the operation gate passage designation command reception flag is set after the right-handed instruction is displayed (step S1808 in FIG. 57; Yes), and the big-hit start designation is designated after the right-handed instruction is displayed. When the command reception flag is set (step S1810 in FIG. 57; Yes), as shown in FIG. 68E, “small hit” is notified in the hit notification effect (see step S1813 in FIG. 58).

  In the following description, it is assumed that the fourth big hit is hit, but the same applies to the case where the third big hit is hit.

  FIG. 69 (a) shows a scene in which the closing time effect A (see FIG. 59) is being executed in the closed state (closing time 2 seconds) of the first round (first time) (the execution of the closing time performance A is started). Scene). As shown in FIG. 34C, the closing time of one round (first time) during the big jackpot gaming state is the second closing time (2 seconds). The CPU 56 of the game control board (main board) 40 designates that it is the first round and that the second closing time (2 seconds) is the closing time. A time designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (see step S1311 in FIG. 31 and FIG. 20A).

  On the other hand, the microcomputer 200 (production control CPU 201) reads a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “02” is set in the EXT data, and the closing time (2 seconds) from the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening closing time designation command. ) Is confirmed (see step S1812 in FIG. 58). Then, the effect control CPU 201 determines a closing time effect (FIG. 59) corresponding to the closing time of the closing time (2 seconds) using a random number for determining the closing time effect (see step S1812 in FIG. 58). In the example of FIG. 69A, the closing time effect A is determined. Then, the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the closing effect A and starts a process timer (see steps S1813 and S1814 in FIG. 58). Then, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 11 in accordance with the contents of the process data n (see step S1904 in FIG. 60). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the closing time effect A is executed on the display screen in the closed state for 2 seconds in the first round (first time). In addition, since the closing time effect A is a countdown effect in which no additional effect is executed, the remaining time displayed first is a time (2 seconds) corresponding to the closing time (2 seconds).

  FIG. 69B is a scene in which the closing time effect A is continuously executed in the closed state of the first round (first time) (closing time 2 seconds) (a scene immediately before the execution of the closing time effect A). is there. In addition, in the scene shown in FIG. 69 (b), the falling ball number effect is also executed together with the closing time effect A. That is, the effect control CPU 201 executes the falling ball number effect process in the closing time of one round (first time) (see step S1905 in FIG. 60), but the specified falling ball number (steps S4004 and 65 in FIG. 64). When “reference” is in the range of “1 (pieces)” to “3 (pieces)”, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), “blue belt” is displayed at the top of the display screen as a flow-down ball number effect. (See FIG. 66).

  FIG. 69 (c) shows a display example in the open state (open time 0.1 second) of one round (first time).

  FIG. 69 (d) shows a scene where the closing time effect E (see FIG. 59) is being executed in the closed state (closing time 7 seconds) of the first round (second time) (the execution of the closing time effect E is started). Scene). As shown in FIG. 34C, the closing time of one round (second time) in the big jackpot gaming state of the fourth jackpot is the third closing time (7 seconds). The CPU 56 of the game control board (main board) 40 designates that it is the first round and the third closing time (7 seconds) is the closing time, and closes the grand prize opening with “03” set in the EXT data. A time designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (see step S2460 in FIG. 40 and FIG. 20A).

  On the other hand, the microcomputer 200 (production control CPU 201) reads a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “03” is set in the EXT data, and the closing time (7 seconds) from the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening closing time designation command. ) Is confirmed (see step S2908 in FIG. 61). Then, the effect control CPU 201 determines a closing time effect (FIG. 59) corresponding to the closing time of the closing time (7 seconds) using a random number for determining the closing time effect (see step S2908 in FIG. 61). In the example of FIG. 69 (d), the closing time effect E is determined. Then, the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the closing effect E and starts a process timer (see steps S2909 and S2910 in FIG. 61). Then, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect display device 11 in accordance with the contents of the process data n (see step S3904 in FIG. 62). Thereby, as shown in FIG.69 (d), the closing time effect E is performed on a display screen in the closed state of 7 seconds of 1 round (2nd time). In addition, since the closing time effect E is a countdown effect for executing the adding effect, the remaining time displayed first is different from the time corresponding to the closing time (7 seconds) (7 seconds) (FIG. 69 (d ) Is 3 seconds).

  In addition, in the scene of FIG. 69 (d), the falling ball number effect is also executed together with the closing time effect E. That is, the effect control CPU 201 executes the falling ball number effect processing in the closing time of one round (second time) (step S3905 in FIG. 62), but this time (in the scene of FIG. 69 (d)), the specified falling ball The sum of the number (see step S4004 in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65) and the number of falling balls specified at the end of the closed state of the first round (first time) (scene in FIG. 69B) is “1 (piece)”. ”To“ 3 (pieces) ”, a“ blue belt ”is displayed as shown in FIG. 69D (see FIG. 66).

  69 (e), 69 (f), 70 (a), and 70 (b), the closing time effect E is continuously executed in the closed state (closing time 7 seconds) in one round (second time). It is a scene.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (e), when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start of execution of the closing time performance E (remaining time 3 seconds → remaining time 1 second), an extra effect (plus 1 second) is executed, and FIG. The remaining time is 2 seconds. Also in the scene of FIG. 69 (f), an extra effect (plus 1 second) is executed, and the remaining time is 3 seconds as shown in FIG. 70 (a). Also in the scene of FIG. 70 (a), an extra effect (plus 2 seconds) is executed, and the remaining time is 5 seconds as shown in FIG. 70 (b).

  69E, 69F, 70A, and 70B, the falling ball number effect is executed together with the closing time effect E. In the scene of FIG. 69 (e), “blue belt” is displayed, but the number of falling balls specified this time (in the scene of FIG. 69 (e)) (see step S4004 and FIG. 65 in FIG. 64), 1 When the sum of the number of falling balls specified at the end of the round (first) closed state (scene in FIG. 69 (b)) is in the range of “1 (piece)” to “3 (piece)”, As shown in 69 (e), a “blue belt” is displayed (see FIG. 66). The scene in FIG. 69 (f) and the scene in FIG. 70 (a) are the same. Further, in the scene of FIG. 70 (b), “green belt” is displayed, but the number of falling balls specified this time (in the scene of FIG. 70 (b)) (see step S4004 and FIG. 65 of FIG. 64) and When the sum of the number of falling balls specified at the end of the closed state of the first round (first time) (scene in FIG. 69 (b)) is in the range of “4 (pieces)” to “6 (pieces)” As shown in FIG. 70B, a “green band” is displayed (see FIG. 66).

  FIG. 70 (c) shows a scene in which the closing time effect E is continuously executed in the closed state (closing time 7 seconds) of the first round (second time) (a scene immediately before the execution of the closing time effect E is finished). is there. In the scene of FIG. 70 (c), “red band” is displayed. However, the number of falling balls specified this time (in the scene of FIG. 70 (c)) (see step S4004 and FIG. 65 in FIG. 64) and 1 When the sum of the number of falling balls specified at the end of the round (first) closed state (scene in FIG. 69 (b)) is in the range of “7 (pieces)” to “8 (pieces)”, As shown in 70 (c), a “red band” is displayed (see FIG. 66).

  FIG. 70 (d) is a display example in the open state (open time 0.1 second) of one round (second time).

  FIG. 70 (e) shows a scene in which the closing time effect B (see FIG. 59) is being executed in the closed state (closing time 2 seconds) of the second round (first time) (the execution of the closing time effect B is started). Scene). As shown in FIG. 34C, the closing time of the second round (first time) during the big jackpot gaming state is the second closing time (2 seconds). The CPU 56 of the game control board (main board) 40 designates that it is the second round and the second closing time (2 seconds) is the closing time, and closes the big prize opening with “12” set in the EXT data. A time designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (see step S2460 in FIG. 40 and FIG. 20A).

  On the other hand, the microcomputer 200 (the CPU 201 for effect control) reads the winning prize closing time designation command in which “12” is set in the EXT data, and the closing time (2 seconds from the value of the EXT data of the winning prize closing time designation command). ) Is confirmed (see step S2908 in FIG. 61). Then, the effect control CPU 201 determines a closing time effect (FIG. 59) corresponding to the closing time of the closing time (2 seconds) using a random number for determining the closing time effect (see step S2908 in FIG. 61). In the example of FIG. 70 (e), the closing time effect B is determined. Then, the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the closing effect B and starts a process timer (see step S2909 and step S2910 in FIG. 61). Then, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect display device 11 in accordance with the contents of the process data n (see step S3904 in FIG. 62). As a result, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the closing time effect B is executed on the display screen in the closed state of 2 rounds (first time) for 2 seconds.

  FIGS. 70 (f) and 70 (g) are scenes in which the closing time effect B is continuously executed in the closed state (closing time 2 seconds) of the second round (first time). As shown in FIG. 70 (e) → FIG. 70 (f) → FIG. 70 (g), the aura of the character (girl) increases with the progress of the closed state of the second round (first time).

  Further, in each scene of FIG. 70 (f) and FIG. 70 (g), the falling ball number effect is executed together with the closing time effect B. In the scene of FIG. 70 (f), “blue belt” is displayed, but the number of falling spheres specified this time (in the scene of FIG. 70 (f)) (see step S4004 and FIG. 65 in FIG. 64) is “ When it is in the range of “1 (piece)” to “3 (piece)”, as shown in FIG. 70F, “blue belt” is displayed (see FIG. 66). In the scene of FIG. 70 (g), “green belt” is displayed, but the number of falling spheres specified this time (in the scene of FIG. 70 (g)) (see step S4004 and FIG. 65 in FIG. 64) is “ When it is in the range of “4 (pieces)” to “6 (pieces)”, as shown in FIG. 70G, “green belt” is displayed (see FIG. 66).

  FIG. 70 (h) is a display example in the open state (open time 0.1 second) of two rounds (first time).

  FIG. 71 (a) shows that the closing time performance C (see FIG. 59) is being executed in the closed state (closing time 7 seconds) of the second round (second time) (the execution of the closing time performance C is started). Scene). As shown in FIG. 34C, the closing time of one round (second time) in the big jackpot gaming state of the fourth jackpot is the third closing time (7 seconds). The CPU 56 of the game control board (main board) 40 designates that it is the second round and the third closing time (7 seconds) is the closing time, and closes the big prize opening with “13” set in the EXT data. A time designation command is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 200 (see step S2460 in FIG. 40 and FIG. 20A).

  On the other hand, the microcomputer 200 (production control CPU 201) reads out the special winning opening closing time designation command in which “13” is set in the EXT data, and the closing time (7 seconds) from the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening closing time designation command. ) Is confirmed (see step S2908 in FIG. 61). Then, the effect control CPU 201 determines a closing time effect (FIG. 59) corresponding to the closing time of the closing time (7 seconds) using a random number for determining the closing time effect (see step S2908 in FIG. 61). In the example of FIG. 71A, the closing time effect C is determined. Then, the effect control CPU 201 selects process data corresponding to the closing effect C and starts a process timer (see step S2909 and step S2910 in FIG. 61). Then, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect display device 11 in accordance with the contents of the process data n (see step S3904 in FIG. 62). As a result, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the closing time effect C is executed on the display screen in the closed state for 2 seconds (second time) for 7 seconds.

  In addition, in the scene of FIG. 71 (a), a falling ball number effect is also executed together with the closing time effect B. That is, the effect control CPU 201 executes the falling ball number effect processing in the closing time of the second round (second time) (step S3905 in FIG. 62), but this time (in the scene of FIG. 71 (a)), the specified falling ball The sum of the number (see step S4004 and FIG. 65 in FIG. 64) and the number of falling balls specified at the end of the second round (first time) closed state (scene in FIG. 70 (g)) is “4 (pieces)”. "To" 6 (pieces) ", as shown in FIG. 71 (a)," green belt "is displayed (see FIG. 66).

  71 (b) and 71 (c) are scenes in which the closing time effect C is continuously executed in the closed state (closing time 7 seconds) of the second round (second time). As shown in FIG. 71 (a) → FIG. 71 (b) → FIG. 71 (c), the number of bugs (cockroaches) increases with the progress of the closed state of the second round (second time).

  Moreover, in each scene of FIG.71 (b) and FIG.71 (c), the falling ball number effect is also performed with the closing time effect C. FIG. In the scene of FIG. 71 (b), “red belt” is displayed, but the number of falling balls specified this time (in the scene of FIG. 71 (b)) and the last of the closed state of the second round (first time) ( When the total number of falling balls specified in the scene in FIG. 70 (g) is in the range of “7 (pieces)” to “8 (pieces)”, as shown in FIG. “Band” is displayed (see FIG. 66). In the scene of FIG. 71 (c), “sakura pattern belt” is displayed, but the number of falling balls specified this time (in the scene of FIG. 71 (c)) and the end of the closed state of two rounds (first time) When the sum of the number of falling balls specified in the above is “13 (pieces)” or more, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), “sakura pattern belt” is displayed (see FIG. 66).

  FIG. 71 (d) shows a display example in the open state (open time 0.1 second) of two rounds (second time). FIG. 71 (e) is a scene displaying “special mode entry!” As an ending effect.

  68 to 71 show the closing time effect and the falling ball number effect during the big hit gaming state (during the small hit gaming state) in the case of the fourth big hit (third small hit), Closing time effect and flow down during big hit game state (during small hit game state) when 2 big hits (1st small hit), 3rd big hit (2nd small hit), 5th big hit (4th small hit) The same applies to the ball number effect.

  In FIGS. 68 to 71, the example in which the closing time effect A, the closing time effect B, the closing time effect C, and the closing time effect E are selected has been described, but the same applies to the case where the closing time effect D is selected. (Not shown). In addition, it has been described that a closing time effect other than the closing time effect (closing time effect A to closing time effect E) shown in FIG. 59 may be prepared. For example, as shown in FIG. A bomb effect may be executed as a closing time effect.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing another display operation example in the effect display device 11. FIG. 72 (A) shows that the effect control CPU 201 uses the closed state as the closing time when the closing state is the second closing time (2 seconds) (that is, the first round and the second closing time (2 seconds)). EXT data specifying “02” in the EXT data specifying the effect, or EXT data specifying the second round and the second closing time (2 seconds) as the closing time This is a display operation example when a bomb effect is selected in the case of receiving a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “12” is set to “12”. As shown in (a) of FIG. 72 (A) → (b) of FIG. 72 (A) → (c) of FIG. 72 (A), the lead wire is shortened according to the remaining time until the open state is reached. (Explosion approaches as the open state approaches.) In FIG. 72A, the display of the falling ball number effect is omitted.

  FIG. 72 (B) shows that the effect control CPU 201 sets the closed time as the closed time when the closed state is the third closed time (7 seconds) (that is, the first round and the third closed time (7 seconds)). EXT data specifying “03” in the EXT data specifying the effect, or EXT data specifying the second round and the third closing time (7 seconds) as the closing time This is a display operation example when the bomb effect is selected in the case of receiving a special winning opening closing time designation command in which “13” is set to “13”. 72 (B), (a) → (b) in FIG. 72 (B) → (c) in FIG. 72 (B) → (d) in FIG. 72 (B), until the open state is reached. The lead wire is shortened according to the remaining time (explosion approaches as the open state approaches). In FIG. 72B, the display of the falling ball number effect is omitted. In the bomb production, the lead is gradually shortened, so the bomb production performed at the third closing time (7 seconds) is longer than the bomb production performed at the second closing time (2 seconds). . The speed at which the lead is shortened in the bomb effect executed in the third closing time (7 seconds) may be slower than in the bomb effect executed in the second closing time (2 seconds).

  Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment has been described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can enhance the interest because a closing time effect and a falling ball number effect are executed. In this embodiment, the example of executing the falling ball number effect in each round (that is, in units of rounds) has been shown. However, in each opening (that is, in units of closing / opening), the falling ball number effect is performed. Also good. That is, according to the falling ball number production, the number of winnings in one opening is intuitive as a number corresponding to the falling ball number specified immediately before the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened (just before being opened). Can grasp. And, until the production color changes from a weak color (such as “blue belt”) to a strong color (such as “red belt”) (until the specific number of falling balls increases), it should not be opened yet. As such, or while the production color is strong (when the specific number of falling balls is large), it is possible to make the player want to open early, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, according to the closing time effect, the timing at which the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened and the timing at which the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be opened is known, so that the player can enjoy the game according to the opening timing.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment has been described. However, the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various operations including the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 11 are described. The production operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, in the above description, the number of falling balls specified at each timing and the number of falling balls specified at the end of one round (first time) are totaled in one round (second time), and the total number of falling balls is obtained. Although the falling ball number effect is determined based on the above, the falling ball number effect may be determined in one round (second time) based on the falling ball number specified at each timing. The same applies to the second round (second round). In the case of not adding 1 round (1st time) in 1 round (2nd time) or not adding 2 rounds (1st time) in 2 rounds (2nd time), the falling ball usually specified Since the number is never 11 or more, the number corresponding to the cherry blossom band may be 10. Note that, as in this embodiment, in the second round of each round (1 round, 2 rounds), the number of falling balls specified at the end of the first round (that is, the number of balls counted as the number of winning prizes) is taken into consideration. By executing the number effect, it is possible to intuitively grasp the number of winnings in each round. For example, at the time of the first opening, 9 are obtained (the flowing ball number effect immediately before the first opening state is a gold band corresponding to 9), and another 10 are obtained (the falling ball immediately before the second opening state) The number production can also be made into a cherry blossom band corresponding to 19 pieces).

  In the above description, the falling ball number effect shown in FIG. 66 is executed according to the specified falling ball number, but the effect of the falling ball number effect is not limited to the above. For example, you may display on the effect display apparatus 11 other than a belt | band | zone. As an example, medals may be displayed on the left side of the display screen according to the specified number of falling balls. For example, when the specified number of falling balls is 1 to 3, one copper-colored medal is displayed, and when the specified number of falling balls is 4 to 6, two copper-colored medals are displayed. When the specified number of falling balls is 7 to 8, one silver medal is displayed. When the specified number of falling balls is 9, two silver medals are displayed. When the number of balls is 10 to 12, one gold medal may be displayed. When the number of falling balls specified is 13 or more, one golden medal may be displayed.

  As another example, the falling ball number effect may be executed using a device other than the effect display device 11. For example, a light emitter (for example, an LED) is arranged near a part of the special variable winning ball device 22 (for example, the covering portion 117) or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the falling ball number effect is produced by the light emitter. May be executed. For example, when the specified number of falling balls is 1 to 3, the light emitting part emits blue light (flashing or lighting, the same applies hereinafter), and when the specified number of falling balls is 4 to 6, When the light emitting part emits green light and the specified falling ball number is 7 to 8, the light emitting part emits red light, and when the specified falling ball number is 9, the light emitting part emits gold light. When the specified number of falling spheres is 10 to 12, the light emitting part emits purple light, and when the specified number of falling spheres is 13 or more, the light emitting part emits various colors (emission color with time). The light may be emitted so as to change. Further, the light emission pattern (for example, blinking speed, mode, etc.) may be varied according to the specified number of falling balls.

  In the above description, the closing time effect executed in the closed state of the first round (first time), the closing time effect executed in the closed state of the first round (second time), and the closed state of the second round (first time). The closing time effect to be executed and the closing time effect to be executed in the closed state of the second round (the second time) are determined independently (independently) (lottery). It is not limited to the above. For example, the closing time effects to be executed in the closed state of the first round (first time, second time) are collectively determined, and the closing time effects to be executed in the closed state of the second round (first time, second time) are collectively determined. Also good. That is, one table in which the first and second closing time effects of each round are combined may be prepared, and a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining the closing time effect may be assigned to each combination. In the above description, the random number for determining the closing time effect is assumed to be 100, but it may be increased as necessary. Further, for example, closing time effects to be executed in the closed state of the first round (first time, second time) and the second round (first time, second time) may be determined collectively.

  In the above description, the closing time effect executed in the closed state of the first round (first time), the closing time effect executed in the closed state of the first round (second time), and the closed state of the second round (first time). The closing time effect to be executed and the closing time effect to be executed in the closed state of the second round (second time) can be different effects, respectively, but the closing time effect to be executed in the closed state of the first round (first time) and The closing time effect performed in the closed state of the first round (second time) may be the same. For example, when the closing time effect A is executed in the closed state of the first round (first time), the closing time effect A may be executed even in the closed state of the first round (second time). Alternatively, the closing time effect executed in the closed state of the first round (first time, second time) and the closing time effect executed in the closed state of the second round (first time, second time) may be the same. . For example, when the closing time effect A is executed in the closed state of the first round (first time), the closing time effect A is also performed in the closed state of the first round (second time), the second round (first time), and the second round (second time). May be executed. According to this, since the same closing time effect is continuously executed a plurality of times, it is possible to increase the degree of understanding of the closing time effect. Even if the same effect is executed, the effect time naturally differs if the closing time is different.

  In the above description, any closing time effect is executed in the big hit game state from the second big hit to the fifth big hit or the small hit game state from the first small hit to the fourth small hit, but the second big hit to the second big hit In the big hit game state of 5 big hits and the small hit game state of 1st small hit to 4th small hit, there may be a case where no closing time effect is executed. That is, in the closing time effect determination table, a determination value to be compared with a random number for determining the closing time effect may be assigned to “no execution of closing time effect”.

  In the above description, the closing time effect is not executed in the first jackpot game state, but the closing time effect may be executed in the first jackpot game state. That is, in the closing time effect determination table, for the first closing time (3 seconds) corresponding to the first big hit, the determination value compared with the random number for determining the closing time effect is set as the closing time effect A to the closing time effect. You may make it allocate to E.

  Moreover, in the said description, although the opening aspect of 2nd-5th big hit and 1st-4th small hit was equivalent, it is good also as a different opening aspect. For example, the small hit may be opened only once.

  The open / close patterns (open / close pattern A, open / close pattern B1 to open / close pattern B4) shown in FIGS. 16, 17, and 18 are examples. For example, in the open / close patterns shown in FIGS. 16, 17, and 18, the start of each round is in a closed state, but the start of each round may be in an open state. For example, in the opening pattern B1 shown in FIG. 17A, the closed state for 7 seconds → the opened state for 0.1 seconds → the closed state for 7 seconds → the opened state for 0.1 seconds → the closed state for 7 seconds → 0 .1 second open state → 7 second closed state → 0.1 second open state, but instead, 0.1 second open state → 7 second closed state → 0.1 second open state → 7 seconds closed state → 0.1 seconds open state → 7 seconds closed state → 0.1 seconds open state → 7 seconds closed state. Further, for example, the open pattern B1 shown in FIG. 17B is a closed state for 7 seconds → an open state for 0.1 seconds → a closed state for 2 seconds → an open state for 0.1 seconds → a closed state for 7 seconds → 0.1 second open state → 2 second closed state → 0.1 second open state, but instead, 0.1 second open state → 2 second closed state → 0.1 second open state State → Closed state for 7 seconds → Open state for 0.1 second → Closed state for 2 seconds → Open state for 0.1 second → Closed state for 7 seconds.

  Moreover, the closing time and the opening time are examples. For example, the opening pattern B2 shown in FIG. 17A is changed to the closed state for 8 seconds → the opened state for 0.1 seconds → the closed state for 3 seconds → the opened state for 0.1 seconds → the closed state for 7 seconds → 0. Four types of closing times may be set such that the opening state is 1 second, the closing state is 2 seconds, and the opening state is 0.1 seconds. The closing time may be set with a flow time Ta (for example, 6 seconds in the above example) as a target. In other words, a closing time of 6 seconds or more (for example, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.) is set as a closing time that can acquire a lot of balls, and a closing time that is difficult to acquire a lot of balls is less than 6 seconds. The closing time (for example, 2 seconds, 3 seconds, etc.) may be set.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the closed state is closed twice in one round (second to fifth big hits, etc.), the big prize opening closing time designation command corresponding to the closing time of the first round (first time), Grand prize opening closing time designation command corresponding to the closing time of the first round (second time) Grand prize opening closing time designation command corresponding to the closing time of the second round (first time), and closing time of the second round (second time) Like the corresponding prize opening closing time designation command, the prize winning opening closing time designation command is transmitted for each closing time (the number of transmissions is 4 times in total). The transmission mode is not limited to this. For example, a special winning opening closing time designation command including information on the closing time of the first round (first time) and information on the closing time of the first round (second time) is transmitted, and information on the closing time of the second round (first time) is transmitted. And a winning prize closing time designation command including information on the closing time of the second round (second time) may be transmitted (the number of times of transmission is two times in total). Also, for example, a special winning opening closing time designation command including information on the closing time of the first round (first time, second time) and information on the closing time of the second round (first time, second time) may be transmitted (transmission). The number of times is 1 in total). Similarly, in the first big hit, a special winning opening closing time designation command including information on closing times of all rounds (1 round to 15 rounds) may be transmitted (the number of times of transmission is one in total). . The same applies to the special winning opening opening time designation command.

  In this embodiment, for example, the opening when opening twice in one round as in the big hit gaming state by the second big hit is a short opening (the opening time is 0. 0 as shown in FIG. 17). Although it is as short as 1 second, it is good also as long open | release (for example, 29.5 second like 1st big hit) about 1 round (2nd time). This makes it difficult for a game ball won at the opening of the first round (second time) (a game ball toward the grand prize opening 24) to be counted as a winning game ball at the opening of the second round (first time). It may be made to become. In addition, as described above, each round starts from an open state, and by increasing the closing time of the first round (second time) before the opening of the second round (first time), the first round (second time) All the game balls won at the time of opening may be detected at the closing time of the first round (second time), and may not be counted as the winning game balls at the time of opening the second round (first time). . Note that a winning may be detected (the number of winnings is counted) in the closed state as well as in the open state. That is, the game balls won when the first round (second round) is released may be counted in the first round (one round (second round)). Similarly to this embodiment, in a mode in which each round starts from a closed state, the closing time of two rounds (first time) before opening of the second round (first time) may be extended.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example in which 0.1 second is released twice in one round is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one 0.1 second release may be performed in one round. According to this, since the number of game balls to be paid out changes depending on how many game balls are put on the movable member, it is possible to make it seem that one closed state lasts for a long time, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. It is done. Not limited to this, three or more 0.1 second releases may be performed, and the number of releases may be different for each round. In this case, if the number of currently executed rounds is not displayed, it becomes ambiguous whether or not the winnings that greatly exceed 10 in each round can be adjusted, and the interest is enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the falling ball number effect is executed during the big (small) hitting, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same effect can be obtained even when the variable winning device 22 is easily opened. . Specifically, during the probability change (in the probability change state), the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the normal time (in the normal state), and the variable winning device 22 is likely to be in an open state. It may be. Also, during the time reduction (during the time reduction state), the second special figure game is easier to be executed than during the normal time. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the special figure 2 executed mainly during the time reduction is more normal. Since the probability of winning a small hit is higher than the specially executed special figure 1 and the variable winning device 22 is likely to be in an open state, the falling ball number effect may be executed in a short time. In addition, since the fluctuation in the super reach is likely to be a big hit than the normal fluctuation and the variable winning device 22 is likely to be in an open state, the falling ball number effect is executed during the super reach. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the effect gate 34 is provided separately from the gate 33, but the gate having the functions of the effect gate 34 and the gate 33 is, for example, the effect in FIG. 1. One gate 34 may be arranged at a position. In this way, members can be reduced. In this case, an effect control command indicating that the above gate (the gate having the functions of the effect gate 34 and the gate 33) has been passed is sent to the effect control microcomputer 200, so that the flow down on the bottom member 23 You only have to keep track of the number.

  In this embodiment, an example in which the special variable winning ball device 22 is provided in the game area 10 has been described. However, another special variable winning ball device may be provided in the game area 10.

  FIG. 73 is a perspective view and a top view of a special variable winning device according to another example. 73, in the big hit gaming state (small hit gaming state), the bottom member 1023 is closed (not shown) and the bottom member 1023 is opened (FIGS. 73A and 73B). Execute the release control for multiple rounds. When the game ball P is in the closed state, the game ball P cannot win the big prize opening 24, but when it is in the open state, the game ball P can win the big prize opening 24. A guide channel portion 1115 is provided in the upper portion of the bottom surface member 1023 in the open state, and the game ball P meanders from the right side to the left side and is inclined as shown in FIG. 73 (B). After passing through 1115, a prize is awarded to the grand prize opening 24. In addition, when the game ball P rides on the upper part of the bottom surface member 1023, the game area is arranged so as to ride from the upstream side (right side) of the guide flow channel portion 1115 without riding from the downstream side (left side) of the guide flow channel portion 1115. Nail etc. should be planted in 10. In addition, when the game ball P gets on the upper part of the bottom member 1023 (upstream of the guide channel 1115), the game ball on the bottom member 1023 (on the guide channel 1115) can be identified as shown in FIG. An effect gate similar to the effect gate 34 is arranged on the upper right side of the bottom member 1023. Thereby, when the special variable winning device shown in FIG. 73 is in the open state, the game ball on the bottom member 1023 can be specified.

  The special variable winning ball apparatus 22 shown in FIG. 2 or the like passes through the bottom member 23 when the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is closed, whereas the special variable winning ball apparatus shown in FIG. 73 is in the open state. Sometimes the game ball passes over the bottom member 1023. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball apparatus shown in FIG. 73 is provided instead of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 shown in FIG. 2 or the like, the falling ball number effect is performed in the open state. That is, in the aspect in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 shown in FIG. 2 or the like is provided, the falling ball number effect process is executed in the jackpot display process (see FIG. 60) or the post-round process (see FIG. 62). In the aspect in which the special variable winning ball apparatus shown in FIG. 6 is provided, for example, the falling ball number effect process may be executed in the round process (FIG. 61) or the like.

  In the embodiment provided with the special variable winning ball device 22 shown in FIG. 2 and the like, a closing time effect corresponding to the closing time during which the game ball can pass through the guide channel portion 115 on the bottom member 23 is executed. In the embodiment provided with the special variable winning ball apparatus shown in FIG. 73, the game ball can pass through the guide channel portion 1115 on the bottom member 1023 during the opening time. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 shown in FIG. 73 is provided in place of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 shown in FIG. 2 or the like, the game ball passes through the guide channel portion 1115 on the bottom member 1023. You may make it perform the opening time effect according to the opening time to obtain. That is, in the embodiment in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 shown in FIG. 2 or the like is provided, the closing time effect is executed based on the value of the EXT data of the special winning opening closing time designation command (see FIG. 20A). For example, in the embodiment in which the special variable winning ball apparatus shown in FIG. 73 is provided, the opening time effect may be executed based on the winning number counter. Specifically, the flow-down time of a game ball that reaches the count switch 1024 through the bottom surface member 1023 is adjusted by the guide channel portion 1115. That is, the game ball fired every 0.6 seconds reaches the count switch 1024 approximately every 0.6 seconds. With this and the winning number counter, it is sufficient to calculate how many seconds later the variable winning device will be closed and execute the effect. In this case, it is effective to execute an effect in which the content of the effect changes depending on the number of riders on the bottom member 1023. Specifically, an effect that shows an increase in the aura, such as the closing time effect B, is executed after the value of the winning number counter reaches 7 and the aura according to the number of game balls riding on the bottom member 1023. Can be increased.

  Further, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices such as the special variable winning ball device 22 may be provided in the game area 10. For example, the two special variable winning ball devices 22 so that a game ball that has passed through the downstream region 23L of the special variable winning ball device 22 arranged on the right side immediately flows to the upstream region 23U of the special variable winning ball device 22 arranged on the left side. May be arranged side by side. When the two special variable winning ball devices 22 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the open state and the closed state of the two special variable winning ball devices 22 are synchronized (the two simultaneously change from the open state to the closed state, and the closed state). If it is controlled so as to change from the state to the open state, more balls can be obtained. The effect gate 34 may be provided on the upper right side (upstream side) of the special variable winning ball device 22 arranged on the right side through which the game ball first passes. Further, in the aspect in which the two special variable winning ball devices 22 are arranged side by side as described above, the game ball on the bottom member 23 of either the left or right special variable winning ball device 22 may be specified. For example, the required time (T1) required for the game ball that has passed through the effect gate 34 to reach the upstream region 23U of the bottom member 23 of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 that is first placed on the right side through which the game ball passes is 1 second. When the required time (T3) to reach the downstream region 23L of the bottom surface member 23 of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 arranged on the left side that passes second from the upstream region 23U is 12 seconds, the timer value is 1 The game ball corresponding to the falling ball timer at the time point from the elapse of seconds to the time point of 13 seconds may be specified as being on the bottom member 23 of the left or right special variable winning ball device 22.

  In this embodiment, the effect gate 34 is arranged on the upper right side (upstream side) of the special variable winning ball device 22, but the effect gate (also on the lower left side (downstream side) of the special variable winning ball device 22 ( (Not shown) may be arranged. As shown in FIG. 1, in the aspect in which only the effect gate 34 is arranged at the upper right (upstream side) of the special variable winning ball device 22, the game ball on the bottom member 23 is specified based on the passage of the effect gate 34. (See FIG. 65), in the aspect in which the effect gates are arranged on the upper right (upstream side) and the lower left (downstream side) of the special variable winning ball device 22, both effect gates (the special variable winning ball device 22 of the special variable winning ball device 22). The game ball on the bottom member 23 may be specified based on the passage through the upper right (upstream) stage gate 34 and the lower left (downstream) stage gate (not shown) of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. . For example, as an effect gate on the lower left side (downstream side) of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, a position immediately after the downstream region 23L of the bottom member 23 (a game ball that has passed through the downstream region 23L is immediately detected. For example, a gate 33. The game ball on the bottom member 23 may be specified as having been passed over the bottom member 23 for the game ball that has passed through the effect gate by arranging the effect gate on the upper side.

  An effect gate may be provided on the lower left side (downstream side) of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 separately from the gate 33, but the gate 33 may also have the function of the effect gate. In this way, members can be reduced. In this case, the gate 33 having the function of the effect gate is arranged above the position shown in FIG. 1 (immediately after the downstream region 23L of the bottom member 23), and the effect control indicating that the gate 33 has passed. By transmitting a command to the production control microcomputer 200, the number of flows down on the bottom member 23 may be grasped.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, since the regulation piece 118 is provided, the game ball slowly passes over the bottom member 23, and the guide channel portion 1115 meanders as shown in FIG. Therefore, the game ball slowly passes over the bottom surface member 1023, but means for slowly passing the game ball is not limited to the above. For example, the game ball may be allowed to pass slowly by magnetic force, or the game ball may be allowed to pass slowly by an adhesive or a material having a high friction coefficient.

  In this embodiment, the specific port 400 is arranged on the upstream side (above) of the effect gate 34, but the positional relationship between the effect gate 34 and the specific port 400 is not limited to this. For example, the effect gate 34 may be provided on the upstream side of the specific port 400. Further, in this embodiment, the specific opening 400 is arranged on the upper right side (upstream side) of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, but the positional relationship between the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 and the specific opening 400 is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, the specific port 400 may be arranged on the lower left side (downstream side) of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. In addition, as shown in FIG. 75, the specific port 400 may be arranged on the bottom surface member 23 of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22.

  In the case where the specific port 400 is arranged at the lower left (downstream side) of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22, the specific port 400 may be provided separately from the gate 33 as shown in FIG. For example, one gate having the functions of the mouth 400 and the gate 33 may be disposed at the specific mouth 400 in FIG. In this way, members can be reduced. In this case, by sending an effect control command indicating that the gate (the gate having the functions of the specific port 400 and the gate 33) has been passed to the effect control microcomputer 200, the passage of the specific port 400 is prevented. You only have to grasp it. Further, one gate having the functions of the specific port 400 and the effect gate 34 may be disposed at the position of the effect gate 34 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in the aspect in which the specific port 400 is arranged on the downstream side of the special variable winning ball device 22, the special variable is compared with the aspect in which the specific port 400 is arranged on the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 22. You may shorten time until the winning ball apparatus 22 is made into an open state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific port 400 arranged on the downstream side of the special variable winning ball device 22, the special variable winning ball device 22 may be opened immediately after the game ball passes. For example, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state may be started from the open state, and the hit notification effect may not be executed or may be executed in the open state. Accordingly, if the game balls are continuously fired, there is a possibility that a plurality of game balls following the game ball that first passes through the specific port 400 are accumulated on the bottom member 23 of the special variable winning ball device 22. Since it is expensive, it is possible to collect those game balls together and win a prize.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 75, in the aspect in which the specific port 400 is arranged on the bottom surface member 23 of the special variable winning ball device 22, compared to the aspect in which the specific port 400 is arranged on the upstream side of the special variable winning ball device 22. The time until the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 is opened may be shortened. For example, when a game ball passes through the specific port 400 arranged on the bottom member 23 of the special variable winning ball device 22, the game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 reaches the downstream region 23 </ b> L of the special variable winning ball device 22. The special variable winning ball apparatus 22 may be opened based on time. For example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 may be in an open state at a time when the game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 reaches the downstream area 23L of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22. Thereby, if the game balls are continuously fired, a plurality of game balls following the game ball that first passed through the specific port 400 may be stored on the bottom member 23 of the special variable winning ball device 22. Since the game balls that have passed through the specific port 400 first are highly likely to be stored on the bottom surface member 23, the game balls can be awarded together.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is provided in a game area (for example, the game area 10) in a game machine that can execute a game (for example, a special game) by using a game medium (for example, a game ball). A first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) by an operation of a movable member (for example, the bottom surface member 23, the bottom surface member 1023, etc.) that forms at least a part of the flow path of the game medium; A variable winning device (for example, the special variable winning ball device 22 shown in FIG. 2, the special variable winning ball device shown in FIG. 73, etc.) that changes to a second state (for example, a closed state) that is difficult or impossible to enter; An adjusting means (for example, a regulation piece 118, a guide channel portion 1115, etc.) provided in the flow path formed by the movable member and capable of adjusting the passage time of the game medium passing through the flow path, and provided in the game area. The game medium passes through a specific area (for example, the specific port 400) through which the game medium can pass and a start area provided in the game area (the first start winning port 13a and the second start winning port 13b). Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning of big hit, small win, etc.) (for example, a part for executing steps S61 and S62 in the game control microcomputer 560); The specific area is provided on the upstream side of the variable prize device in the game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 1, the specific port 400 is arranged on the upper right side of the special variable prize ball apparatus 22. The variable winning device determines that the game medium has passed through the specific area on the condition that the predetermined condition is determined to be satisfied by the determination means. In Zui and, by the operation of the movable member is changed to the first state (open state) from the second state (closed state). For example, if the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the game is a jackpot (step S71 in FIG. 26), the jackpot start pre-processing in FIG. 31 is executed. Further, the CPU 56 determines that it is a small hit (step S63 in FIG. 26). The small hitting start preprocessing of FIG. 32 is executed. In the pre-hit start pre-processing of FIG. 31, based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific port 400 and the specific port switch is turned on (step S1306; Yes), the pre-opening process for the big winning opening shown in FIGS. (Step S1313), and the special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state (Step S1406 in FIG. 36, Step S1416 in FIG. 37). In the small hit start pre-processing of FIG. 32, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific port 400 and the specific port switch is turned on (step S1356; Yes), the process proceeds to the small hit release pre-processing shown in FIG. (Step S 1363), the special winning opening is controlled to the open state. Therefore, after the game ball is launched and passes through the specific port 400, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

  The specific area (specific port 400) may be provided downstream of the variable winning device in the game area (for example, as shown in FIG. 74, the specific port 400 is provided with the special variable winning ball device 22). Or may be provided in a flow path formed by the movable member (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, it may be provided in a flow path on the bottom member 23).

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes game content notification means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 201 displays an explanation screen in step S1802 in FIG. 57) that notifies the game content, and the game content notification means includes The contents of the game are notified while the passage of the specific area is invalid. That is, it is after the explanation screen end designation command flag is set (that is, after the explanation screen is finished displaying) whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific port 400 (see FIG. 57). ), Until the display of the explanation screen is completed (for example, when the symbol is changing or the explanation screen is being displayed), the passage of the game medium through the specific port 400 is invalid. Alternatively, the passage through the specific port 400 after the explanation screen end designation command flag is set is effective as a condition for proceeding to the next process (shifting to the jackpot display process), but the explanation screen end designation command flag is set. Passing through the specific port 400 before being performed (for example, during symbol variation or display of an explanation screen) is invalid as a condition for proceeding to the next processing (shifting to jackpot display processing). While the passage of the specific port 400 is invalid (for example, while the symbol is changing or the explanation screen is being displayed), the explanation screen is displayed (step S1802). Therefore, since an appropriate game is executed in accordance with the description of the game content, it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a gaming state notifying means (for example, the effect control CPU 201 can select “15R probability variation”, “2R probability variation” or “2R probability variation” in step S1813 in FIG. The determination means includes a plurality of types of identifications having different earned value expectations (for example, expectation of appearance) based on the game medium passing through the starting area. It is determined whether or not a condition to be controlled to any one of the gaming states (the first big hit to the fifth big hit game state) is established, and the gaming state notification means is configured to specify the plurality of types by the determination means. On the condition that it is determined that a condition to be controlled in any one of the gaming states has been established, the condition to be controlled by the determination means when the game medium passes through the specific area is It has informed the type of the specific game state that is determined to be standing. For example, in step S1813 of FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 201 is notified of “15R probability change” when the big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the big hit start 1 designation command is stored, and corresponds to the big hit start 2 designation command. “2R probability change” is notified when the big hit start designation command reception flag is stored, and “small hit” is notified when the big hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the small hit start designation command is stored. The process data is selected. Therefore, it can be noted which is notified when passing, and the interest of the game at the time of passing can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable prize apparatus is configured such that when a predetermined time has elapsed since the game medium passed through the specific area, on condition that the predetermined condition is determined to be satisfied by the determination means. The game state changes from the second state (closed state) to the first state (open state), and the predetermined time is the time for the game medium that has passed through the specific area in the game area to flow down to the position of the variable winning device. Based on the time. Specifically, after the game ball passes through the specific port 400, the time until the first round (first time) is released (preparation time Tb before opening after passing through the specific port), or the game ball passes through the specific port 400 The game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 is a special variable winning ball device for a period of time until the first round (first time) is released after a predetermined time elapses (preparation time Td before release after non-passage notification). The time until reaching the downstream region 23L of the bottom surface member 23 (downflow) (the downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port) is set to be a time. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the downstream area 23L, the possibility that the special variable winning ball device 22 is in an open state is increased, and it is possible to easily win the gaming ball. Further, since the game ball that first passes through the specific port 400 is opened before the special variable winning ball device 22 finishes flowing down, it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible. You can also.

  In the case of a mode in which each round of the big hit gaming state starts from the closed state, the time until the game ball enters the open state for the first round (first time) after passing through the specific port 400 (open after passing through the specific port) The pre-preparation time Tb) is a total time of the execution time of the hit notification effect and the time of the closed state (closed time) of one round (first time) (see FIGS. 16 and 17). In the case of the start mode, the pre-opening preparation time Tb after passing through the specific mouth is equal to the execution time of the hit notification effect. Similarly, in the case where each round of the small hit game state is started from the closed state, the game ball enters the open state for the first round after the predetermined time has passed without passing through the specific port 400. Time (preparation time Td before opening after not passing notification) is a total time of the execution time of the hit notification effect and the time (closed time) of the closed state of the first round (first time) (see FIG. 18), In the case of starting each round from the open state, the pre-opening preparation time Td after not-passing notification is equal to the execution time of the hit notification effect.

  Note that the game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 is placed in the downstream region 23L of the bottom member 23 of the special variable winning ball device 22 for the above-described pre-opening pre-opening preparation time Tb and non-passing pre-opening preparation time Td. The game ball that has passed through the specific port 400 is not the time based on the time until it reaches (flows down) (the downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port), but the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 23 may be a time based on the time required to reach (flow down) the upstream region 23U (downstream region arrival time Tc after passing through the specific port). When the game ball that first passes through the specific port 400 reaches the upstream region 23U, the possibility that the special variable winning ball device 22 is in an open state is high, and it is possible to easily win the gaming ball. .

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable winning device is configured so that the predetermined upper limit winning number (10) of game media has won a prize from the first state (open state) to the second state (closed state). The upper limit number of game media can be simultaneously present in the flow path on the movable member. That is, if it is within an interval period such as 7 seconds that is equal to or longer than the flow-down time Ta (6 seconds), before the interval period ends (before the special variable winning ball device 22 that has been closed transitions to the open state). The maximum number (10) of game balls can be stored on the bottom member 23. Therefore, attention can be paid to whether or not a game medium with the maximum number of winnings can be placed, and the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable prize apparatus is configured such that when a predetermined period shorter than a required period for the game medium to flow from the upstream region to the downstream region of the movable member (for example, the bottom surface member 23) has elapsed. The second state (closed state) is changed to the first state (open state). For example, in the case of the first big hit, when the first closing time (3 seconds) shorter than the flow-down time Ta (6 seconds) has elapsed, the closed state is changed to the open state. Further, when the second to fifth big hits or the first to fourth small hits, the second closed time (2 seconds) shorter than the flow-down time Ta (6 seconds) has passed and the state changes from the closed state to the open state. There is a case to let you. Therefore, the game ball is opened before the special variable winning ball device 22 finishes flowing down, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing as much as possible.

  As another aspect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above can execute a game (for example, a special game) using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and a game area (for example, a game area 10). ) And a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter by an operation of a movable member (for example, the bottom surface member 23, the bottom surface member 1023, etc.) that forms at least a part of the flow path of the game medium. ) And a second state that is difficult to enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state) (for example, the special variable winning ball device 22 in FIG. 2, the special variable winning ball device in FIG. 73, etc.) ), A game medium specifying means (for example, the process of step S4004 in FIG. 64 executed by the effect control CPU 201) for specifying a game medium passing on the movable member, and an effect (for example, An effect execution means (for example, a process for determining the falling ball number effect by the effect control CPU 201 (step S4005 in FIG. 64) or process data corresponding to the falling ball number effect) is selected. Processing (step S4006 in FIG. 64) and processing (step S1904 in FIG. 60, step S3904 in FIG. 62) for controlling the effect display device 11 according to the process data, etc., and the effect executing means specifies the game medium identification The effect is executed based on the fact that the means specifies the game medium (for example, the effect control CPU 201 determines the falling ball number effect corresponding to the specified number of game media in step S4005 of FIG. Run in post-round processing).

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the effect executing means executes an effect (for example, a falling ball number effect) based on the number of game media specified by the game medium specifying means. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may execute an effect based on whether or not a game medium is specified. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may execute the effect when specified without specifying the effect when it is not specified.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided on the upstream side of the variable prize device in the gaming area, and includes upstream gaming medium detection means (for example, an effect gate 34) for detecting passage of gaming media, and the gaming The medium specifying means specifies the game medium passing on the movable member based on the fact that the upstream game medium detecting means detects the game medium. For example, the effect control CPU 201 starts the falling ball timer each time the game ball passes through the effect gate 34 (each time the effect gate passage designation command reception flag is set) (see step S4003), and the falling ball timer concerned. The number of game media (the number of falling balls) on the bottom member 23, which is a movable member, is specified based on the timer value (see step S4004). Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines whether or not there is a game ball on the bottom member 23 (or whether there is a game ball on the bottom member 23 based on the weight of the object on the bottom member 23 being measured). ) May be specified. For example, a value when the number of game balls is one (comparison value), a value when there are two game balls,..., A value when there are n game balls are stored as reference values, respectively. The number of falling balls on the bottom member 23 (or whether or not there is a game ball on the bottom member 23) may be specified by comparing with actual measurement values.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in a flow path formed by the movable member, and adjustment means (for example, a regulation piece 118, a guide flow path portion 1115, etc.) that can adjust the passage time of the game medium passing through the flow path. ). In addition, regarding the adjustment means described above, the examples shown in FIGS. 2 to 7 are examples of adjustments that increase the passage time of the game medium (slow the passage speed). For example, a member having a large friction coefficient is used. Game media by using it to form a flow path, increase the inclination of the flow path, replace part or all of the inclined part in the flow path with a falling part, reduce or eliminate the number of nails An adjustment may be made to shorten the passage time of (i.e., increase the passage speed).

  The game medium specifying means specifies the game medium that has passed over the movable member based on the passage time of the game medium adjusted by the adjusting means. For example, as shown in FIG. 65, it is assumed that a game ball corresponding to a falling ball timer whose timer value is 1 second to 7 seconds elapses exists on the bottom surface member 23. In other words, it is assumed that the game ball that has passed 7 seconds has passed over the bottom surface member 23 that is a movable member.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided downstream of the variable winning device in the gaming area, and downstream gaming medium detecting means for detecting the passage of gaming media (for example, the lower left of the special variable winning ball device 22 ( A game gate that passes over the movable member based on the fact that the downstream game medium detecting means detects the game medium. Can also be specified. For example, as described above, the game ball that has passed through the effect gate installed at the lower left (downstream side) can be identified as the game ball on the bottom member 23 as having passed through the bottom member 23. .

  In addition, the effect execution means can execute the effect using a light emitter provided in the variable winning device. For example, as described above, a light emitter (for example, LED) is disposed on a part of the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 (for example, the covering portion 117), and the falling ball number effect is executed by the light emitter. Good. Alternatively, a light emitter (for example, an LED) may be disposed in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the falling ball number effect may be executed by the light emitter.

  Further, the effect execution means executes the effect using an image display device provided in the game area. For example, as described in this embodiment, a band is displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 11 (see, for example, FIGS. 69 to 71).

  Further, the variable winning device (for example, the variable winning device 22 or the like) moves the movable member forward and backward in the front-rear direction, thereby moving the first state (for example, the open state) to the second state (for example, the closed state). When the movable member can change from the second state to the first state (that is, some sort of state) (i.e., from the second state to the first state) When the condition is satisfied or the like can be in an open state, etc.). For example, as described in this embodiment, the falling ball number effect is executed in the big hit game state of the second to fifth big hits and the small hit game state of the first to fourth small hits. As described above, the falling ball number effect may be executed even in the big hit game state of the first big hit.

  As another aspect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a gaming machine capable of executing a game (for example, a special game) using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and a game area (for example, a game) In a first state in which a game medium can enter (e.g., by the movement of a movable member (e.g., bottom member 23, bottom member 1023, etc.) that is provided in the region 10 and forms at least a part of the flow path of the game medium). A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 22 such as FIG. 2 or a special variable winning symbol shown in FIG. 73) that changes into a second state (for example, a closed state) that is difficult or impossible to enter. A ball apparatus and the like, and an adjustment means (for example, a regulation piece 118 or a guide flow path portion 1115) provided in a flow path formed by the movable member and capable of adjusting the passage time of the game medium passing through the flow path, Production (example For example, the closing time effect corresponding to the closing time is determined in step S1812 in FIG. 58 or step S2908 in FIG. 61 by the effect control CPU 201 for executing the closing time effect or the like. Means for performing post-processing), and a first state change waiting time (for example, a closing time, etc.), which is a time until the variable winning device changes from the second state to the first state, is a plurality of types ( For example, there are a first closing time, a second closing time, a third closing time, and the like shown in FIG. 20, and the effect executing means performs an effect (for example, a closing time effect or the like) according to the first state change waiting time. ) Can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, the second closing time (2 seconds), the closing time effect A to the closing time effect E according to the third closing time (7 seconds), etc. It is possible to run). In addition, regarding the adjustment means described above, the examples shown in FIGS. 2 to 7 are examples of adjustments that increase the passage time of the game medium (slow the passage speed). For example, a member having a large friction coefficient is used. Game media by using it to form a flow path, increase the inclination of the flow path, replace part or all of the inclined part in the flow path with a falling part, reduce or eliminate the number of nails An adjustment may be made to shorten the passage time of (i.e., increase the passage speed).

  The effect is an effect suggesting the remaining time of the first state change waiting time in the second state. For example, the closing time effect D (or the bomb effect) shown in FIG. 59 suggests the remaining time of the closing time. Further, the closing time effect A and the closing time effect E shown in FIG. 59 notify the remaining time of the closing time.

  The effect is an effect that suggests an elapsed time since the change from the first state to the second state. For example, the closing time effect B and the closing time effect C shown in FIG. 59 indicate the elapsed time.

  The effect is an effect suggesting any one of the first state change waiting times determined among the plurality of types of the first state change waiting times. For example, the bomb effect (see FIG. 72 (B)) executed when it is the third closing time (7 seconds) is the bomb effect (FIG. 72 (A)) executed when it is the second closing time (2 seconds). Compared to the reference), the bomb production with a long igniting line suggests the third closing time (7 seconds), and the bombing with a short igniting line suggests the second closing time (2 seconds). It is a production to do. Also, for example, the speed of the bomb effect executed at the third closing time (7 seconds) is shorter than that of the bomb effect executed at the second closing time (2 seconds), with the initial conducting wire fixed. , A bomb effect with a slow swift speed is an effect suggesting a third closing time (7 seconds), and a bomb effect with a fast swift speed is a second closing time (2 seconds). This is an effect that suggests. Further, for example, the closing time effect D executed at the third closing time (7 seconds) is slower than the closing time effect D executed at the second closing time (2 seconds) (or originally bursting from the beginning) Is a large balloon that does not swell), or the closing time effect D of the large balloon is slow or the closing time effect D of the large balloon suggests the third closing time (7 seconds). This effect suggests the second closing time (2 seconds). For example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the second closing time (2 seconds) is reached, the closing time effect A is more easily selected than when the third closing time (7 seconds) is reached, and the third closing time ( Since the closing time effect E is more easily selected than when it is the second closing time (2 seconds), the closing time effect A is an effect that suggests the second closing time (2 seconds). The closing time effect E is an effect suggesting the third closing time (7 seconds).

  The effect execution means is an effect corresponding to the false first state change waiting time different from the effect corresponding to the true first state change waiting time (for example, the closing time in which the initial value of the countdown is different from the closing time) Fake effect execution means (for example, the process of step S1812 of FIG. 58 by the CPU 201 for effect control or the process of step S2908 of FIG. 61, etc.) by which the closing time closing time effect E can be determined. The false effect executing means includes an effect corresponding to the true first state change waiting time after executing the effect corresponding to the false first state change waiting time (for example, FIG. 69 (e) to FIG. 70). The extra effect shown in (a) is executed.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various presentation operations including the presentation image display operation in the display area of the presentation display device 11, etc., depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  For example, the determination ratio of the special figure display result shown in FIG. 14, the determination ratio of the jackpot type shown in FIG. 15, the determination ratio of the closing time effect shown in FIG. 59, etc. are arbitrary within the scope of the present invention. Changes and modifications are possible. Further, as described above, the same applies to the effect of the falling ball number effect shown in FIG.

  Further, in the above description, based on the timer value of each falling ball timer corresponding to the game medium that has passed through the effect gate 34 (specifically, counting the number of falling ball timers within a predetermined timer value range). ), The number of game media (the number of falling balls) on the movable member (bottom surface member 23) is specified, but the number of game media of the movable member may be specified by calculation.

  In the above description, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the effect gate 34 on the main board 40 side, but the game ball is also displayed on the effect control board 80 side. The same may be detected.

  In addition, as an example of the explanation display (explanation screen) of the game content, an example in which the word “I will inform you by passing through the gate” is displayed in FIG. 68B, but the display mode of the explanation display of the game content is as follows. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Other words may be used, animation may be used, or voice may be used. In addition, as an example of the right-handed instruction, an example in which the word “right-handed!” Is displayed in FIG. 68C, but the display mode of the right-handed instruction is not limited to this. Other words may be used, animation may be used, or voice may be used.

  In the above description, in the hit notification effect, when the hit is the second big hit to the fifth big hit, the 2R probability change is made without distinguishing the second big hit, the third big hit, the fourth big hit and the fifth big hit. However, you may make it alert | report so that each (2nd big hit, 3rd big hit, 4th big hit, 5th big hit) can be distinguished. Further, in the above description, in the hit notification effect, in the case of the first small hit to the fourth small hit, the first small hit, the second small hit, the third small hit, and the fourth small hit are not distinguished. However, it is possible to notify each of them (the first small hit, the second small hit, the third small hit, and the fourth small hit) in a distinguishable manner.

  In the above description, in the small hit (first small hit to fourth small hit), the hit notification effect executed when the game ball passes the specific opening 400 before the elapse of a predetermined time after the end of the explanation display. However, in the hit notification effect that is executed when a predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400, the hit type (specifically, the small hit) is described. In the hit notification effect that is executed when a predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400, the hit type may not be notified. For example, in the fanfare pre-processing shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, when the operation gate passage designation flag is set (step S1808; Yes), control is performed so as to read process data including “small hit” image data. If the operation gate passage designation flag is not set and the big hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S1810; Yes), control is performed so as to read process data that does not include “small hit” image data. You may make it do. Similarly, for the big hit (the first big hit to the fifth big hit), when a predetermined time has passed without the game ball passing through the specific port 400, the type of the hit may not be notified.

  In the above description, in the hit notification effect, the hit type is notified, but the expectation degree of the hit type may be notified. “2R probability change?”, “2R probability change or 15R probability change”, and the like may be displayed.

  In the above description, the variation pattern type is determined using random 2 on the main substrate 40 side, but the variation pattern type may be determined on the effect control substrate 80 side. The same applies to the determination of the variation pattern. In the above description, the closing time effect is determined on the effect control board 80 side, but the closing time effect may be determined on the main board 40 side. In the above description, the falling ball number effect is determined on the effect control board 80 side. However, when it is detected that the game ball has passed the effect gate 34 on the main board 40 side, on the main board 40 side. The falling ball number effect may be determined. In the aspect in which the closing time effect and the falling ball number effect are determined on the main board 40 side, the determined contents may be notified to the effect control board 80 side by the effect control command.

  In addition, a game score for use in a game is given by using the number of game values having a size specified by the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, and the given game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a score or a game score given by winning a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for deriving and displaying the display results. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the variation control pattern 200 indicating the variation mode such as the variation time, the type of reach production, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. to the production control microcomputer 200 (production control CPU 201), the variation is changed. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted when starting is shown, variation patterns may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 200 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 (CPU 56) uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. Is a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop, and the second command has reached a reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. May be configured to transmit a command indicating the variation time and variation mode after the so-called second stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 200 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 200 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 3 ... Front frame 4 ... Glass door frame 5 ... Lower door frame 6 ... Hitting ball supply tray 7 ... Surplus ball receiving tray 8 ... Hitting ball operation handle 9 ... Game board 10 ... Game area 11 ... Production display device 11L, 11C 11R ... Symbol display area 12a ... First special symbol display 12b ... Second special symbol display 13a ... First start winning port 13b ... Second start winning port 14a ... First start port switch 14b ... First winning check switch 15a ... 2nd start opening switch 15b ... 2nd winning confirmation switch 16 ... Solenoid 17 ... Opening and closing plate 18 ... Special symbol storage memory indicator 19a ... 1st storage memory display part 19b ... 2nd storage memory display part 20 ... Ordinary winning device 21 ... Ordinary variable winning device 22 ... Special variable winning ball device 23 ... Bottom member 23U ... Upstream region 23L ... Downstream region 24 ... winning opening 25a ... count switch 25b ... third prize confirmation switch 26 ... normal symbol display 27 ... normal symbol hold memory indicator 28 ... out port 29 ... speaker 30a ... top frame lamp 30b ... left frame lamps 30a ... right frame Lamp 32, 33 ... Gate 32a, 33a ... Gate switch 34 ... Production gate (first production gate)
34a ... Production gate switch (first production gate switch)
35 ... Decorative frame 36 ... Right passage area 37 ... Dispensing control board 40 ... Game control board (main board)
41 ... Lamp driver board 54 ... ROM
55… RAM
56 ... CPU
57 ... I / O port part 58 ... Input driver circuit 59 ... Output circuit 59
60 ... Random number circuit 64 ... Information output circuit 70 ... Audio output board 74 ... Unidirectional circuit 77 ... Relay board 80 ... Production control board 91 ... Terminal board 97 ... Ball dispenser 101 ... Base plate part 102 ... Housing hole 103 ... Drive Device 104… Accommodating portion 105… Plunger 106… Solenoid 107… Pivoting hole 108… First arm portion 109… Long hole 110… Shaft portion 111… Second arm portion 112… Channel formation base portion 113… Upstream channel portion 114 ... Downstream channel part 115 ... Guide channel part 116 ... Guide part 117 ... Cover part 118 ... Restriction piece 200 ... Microcomputer 201 for effect control 201 ... CPU for effect control
202 ... Input driver 203 ... Input port 204, 205 ... Output port 209 ... VDP
351: Input driver 352 ... LED driver 400 ... Specific port 400a ... Specific port switch 560 ... Game control microcomputer 571 ... Output port 702 ... Input driver 703 ... Speech synthesis IC
704 ... Voice data ROM
705 ... Amplifier circuit 706 ... Volume 1023 ... Bottom member 1024 ... Count switch 1115 ... Guide channel

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a game with a game medium,
A variable that is provided in the game area and changes between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to enter or cannot enter by the operation of a movable member that forms at least a part of the flow path of the game medium. A winning device;
An adjusting means provided in a flow path formed by the movable member and capable of adjusting a transit time of a game medium passing through the flow path;
A specific area provided in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on a game medium passing through a start area provided in the game area;
The specific area is
In the game area is provided on the upstream side of the variable winning device,
The variable winning device is:
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination means, the state changes from the second state to the first state by the operation of the movable member based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by that. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game with a game medium,
A variable that is provided in the game area and changes between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to enter or cannot enter by the operation of a movable member that forms at least a part of the flow path of the game medium. A winning device;
An adjusting means provided in a flow path formed by the movable member and capable of adjusting a transit time of a game medium passing through the flow path;
A specific area provided in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on a game medium passing through a start area provided in the game area;
The specific area is
In the game area, provided downstream of the variable winning device,
The variable winning device is:
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination means, the state changes from the second state to the first state by the operation of the movable member based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by that. In a gaming machine capable of executing a game with a game medium,
A variable that is provided in the game area and changes between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to enter or cannot enter by the operation of a movable member that forms at least a part of the flow path of the game medium. A winning device;
An adjusting means provided in a flow path formed by the movable member and capable of adjusting a transit time of a game medium passing through the flow path;
A specific area through which game media can pass,
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on a game medium passing through a start area provided in the game area;
The specific area is
Provided in the flow path formed by the movable member;
The variable winning device is:
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the determination means, the state changes from the second state to the first state by the operation of the movable member based on the passage of the game medium through the specific area. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images